CLS (2022) - Automotive Mercedes-Benz - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL CLS (2022) Mercedes-Benz

The following online version of the Owner's Manual describes all models as well as all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Country-specific differences in the language variants are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for safety-relevant systems and functions. Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner's Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle model years. The online version is the current valid Owner's Manual version. Possible variations to your vehicle may not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles and equipment to the state of the art and introduces changes in design and equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner's Manual, any supplementary documents and the digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Copyright

All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics, are subject to Copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied for commercial purposes or for transmission, nor changed and used on other websites.

Blue Mercedes-Benz S-MB 652 sedan parked on a road with green grass background (no visible text or symbols on vehicle body)

CLS

Operator's Manual

Mercedes-Benz

Front passenger airbag warning

AIRBAG NO i i

AIRBAG

Three black-and-white icons representing prohibited behaviors: no litter, sitting on a phone with a bird, and an open book with a finger pointing at it.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.

▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz

Before your first drive, please read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer service life of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Owner's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people.

The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the following factors:

• Model
• Order
  • National version
• Availability

Your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations in individual cases.

The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a left-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand drive vehicles, the layout of vehicle parts and controls differs accordingly.

Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehicles further.

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:

• Design
• Equipment
• Technical features

The following documents are components of the vehicle:

• Digital Owner's Manual
• Printed Owner's Manual
• Service Booklet
• Supplementary manuals relating to specific equipment
• Supplementary documents

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental.

Symbols 5

At a glance 6

Cockpit 6

Indicator and warning lamps 8

Overhead control panel 10

Door operating unit and seat adjustment ..... 12

Emergencies and breakdowns 14

Digital Owner's Manual 16

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ..... 16

General notes 18

Protection of the environment 18

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 18

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 19

Owner's Manual 20

Mercedes me App 20

Operating safety 21

Notes on assembling the number plate on

the front licence plate holder 22

Declarations of conformity and notes on

driving in different countries 23

Diagnostics connection 32

Qualified specialist workshop 33

Vehicle registration 34

Correct use of the vehicle 34

Information on the REACH regulation 34

Notes for persons with electronic medical

aids 34

Implied warranty 35

QR code for rescue card 35

Data storage 35

Copyright 39

Occupant safety 40

Restraint system 40

Seat belts 42

Airbags 46

PRE-SAFE ^® system 53

Safely transporting children in the vehicle ..... 54

Notes on pets in the vehicle 74

Opening and closing 75

Key 75

Doors 78

Boot 83

Side windows 88

Sliding sunroof 91

Roller sunblinds 94

Anti-theft protection 95

Seats and stowing 98

Notes on the correct driver's seat position .... 98

Notes on grab handles 98

Seats 99

Steering wheel 107

Easy entry and exit feature 109

Memory function 110

Stowage areas 112

Sockets 121

Wireless charging of the mobile phone

and connection with the exterior aerial ..... 123

Fitting/removing the floor mats 125

Light and sight 126

Exterior lighting 126

Interior lighting 134

Windscreen wipers and windscreen

washer system 136

Mirrors 138

Area permeable to radio waves on the windscreen 141 Infrared-reflective windscreen function 141

Climate control .... 142 Overview of climate control systems .... 142 Operating the climate control system .... 143

Driving and parking 152
Driving 152
DYNAMIC SELECT switch 164
Automatic transmission 166
Function of 4MATIC 171
Refuelling 171
Parking 177
Driving and driving safety systems 182
Trailer hitch 239
Bicycle rack function 245
Vehicle towing instructions 247

Instrument display and on-board computer 249
Notes on the instrument display and on-board computer 249
Overview of instrument display 250
Overview of buttons on the steering wheel 251
Operating the on-board computer 251
Overview of displays on the instrument display 253
Head-up display 253

MBUX multimedia system .... 256 Overview and operation .... 256 System settings .... 266 Navigation .... 270 Telephone .... 279 Mercedes me app .... 282 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system .... 291 Radio, media & TV .... 295 Sound settings .... 302

Maintenance and care .... 303 ASSYST PLUS service interval display .... 303 Maintenance Management .... 304

Telediagnostics .... 304 Engine compartment .... 305 Cleaning and care .... 311

Breakdown assistance .... 319 Emergency .... 319 Flat tyre .... 321 Battery (vehicle) .... 326 Tow-starting or towing away .... 332 Electrical fuses .... 336

Wheels and tyres .... 340 Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics .... 340 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres .... 340 Notes on snow chains .... 340 Tyre pressure .... 341 Wheel change .... 345 Emergency spare wheel .... 355

Technical data 357 Notes on technical data 357

On-board electronics 357

Regulatory radio identification and notes ..... 359

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and

engine number overview 360

Operating fluids 362

Vehicle data 371

Trailer hitch 372

Display messages and warning/indicator

lamps 374

Display messages 374

Warning and indicator lamps 432

Index 448

In this Owner's Manual, you will find the following symbols:

WARNING Danger due to not observing the warning notices

Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

▶ Observe the warning notices.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental notes

Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal.

▶ Observe environmental notes.

NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage

Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.

▶ Observe notes on material damage.

These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.

Instruction

(→ page) Further information on a topic

Display Display field in the Instrument Display/media display

Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system

* Indicates a cause

At a glance - Cockpit

Left-hand-drive vehicles

① Steering wheel gearshift paddles → 169
② Combination switch → 128
③ Instrument display → 250
4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 166
5 Media display → 256
6 Start/stop button → 153
7 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps → 50
8 Climate control systems → 143
9 Glove compartment → 115
10 Hazard warning light system → 128
⑪ Stowage compartment → 115
12 Touchpad → 259
13 Controller for volume and switching sound on/off → 256
14 Switches the MBUX multimedia system → 256 on/off
15 Rear-window roller sunblind → 94

16 ECO start/stop function → 161
17 Active Parking Assist → 233
18 Sets the vehicle level → 219
19 DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 165
20 Calls up MBUX multimedia system applications → 259
21 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system → 251
22 Adjusts the steering wheel electrically → 108
Switches the steering wheel heater → 109 on/off
23 Control panel:
On-board computer → 251
Cruise control or variable limiter → 192
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC → 196
24 Diagnostics connection → 32
25 Opening the bonnet → 306
26 (P) Electric parking brake → 178
27 Light switch → 126

At a glance - Indicator and warning lamps

Instrument display

① Turn signal lights → 128
2 Trailer hitch → 435
3 Restraint system → 434
4 ESP ^® OFF → 443
ESP ^® → 443
5 0‡ Rear fog light → 127
6 High beam → 128
ID Low beam → 126

00≤ Standing lights → 126
7 Coolant temperature → 437
8 Coolant temperature display → 250
9 (P) Electric parking brake (yellow) → 440
10 (1) Brakes (yellow) → 440
11 Distance warning → 442

Electrical fault → 437
Electric power steering → 435
14 ABS → 443
15 Tyre pressure monitoring system → 446
16 00 Diesel engine: preglow
17 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location → 437 indicator
18 Fuel level → 250
19 (P) Electric parking brake (red) → 440
20 (1) Brakes(red) → 440
21 Seat belt → 434
Engine diagnostics → 437
23 Suspension → 442

Sun visors
2 Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off → 134
3 Switches the automatic interior lighting → 134 control on/off
4 SOS SOS button → 282
5 Switches the front interior lighting on/off → 134
6 me button → 282

⑦ Switches the rear interior lighting on/off → 134
8 Switches the right-hand reading lamp → 134 on/off
9 Spectacles compartment
10 Opens/closes the sliding sunroof → 91
11 Inside rearview mirror → 139

At a glance - Door operating unit and seat adjustment

① Adjusts the seats electrically → 101
Switches the seat heating on/off → 105
3 Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 107
4 Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 79
5 Opens/closes the boot lid → 83
6 Operates the outside mirrors → 138
7 Opens/closes the right side window → 88
8 Opens/closes the rear right side window → 88
9 Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 73
10 Opens/closes the rear left side window → 88
11 Opens/closes the left side window → 88

⑫ Opens the door → 79
13 M Operates the memory function → 111
14 Adjusts the head restraints → 101
15 Configuring the seat settings → 103
16 Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position → 99
17 Adjusts the seat cushion length → 99
18 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support → 99
19 Adjusting the seat backrest inclination → 99
20 Adjusts the seat height → 99
21 Adjusts the seat cushion inclination → 99

B-pillar with: QR code for accessing the rescue card → 35
② Safety vests → 319
me button → 282
SOS SOS button → 282
④ To check and top up operating fluids → 362
5 Tow-starting or towing away → 332
6 Flat tyre → 321
⑦ Starting assistance → 330
8 Hazard warning light system → 128

9 Fire extinguisher → 320
10 Fuel filler flap with:
information label on fuel type → 171
information label on tyre pressure → 342
QR code for accessing the rescue card → 35
⑪ Tow-starting or towing away → 332
12 TREFIT kit → 323
13 First-aid kit (soft sided) → 320
14 Warning triangle → 319

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual

Multimedia system:

The Digital Owner's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system.

Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual:
- Search: search for keywords in order to find quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle.
- Quick start: here is where you find the first steps towards setting up your vehicle.

• Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
• Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions.
• Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the Instrument Display.
  • Bookmarks: gain access to your personally saved bookmarks.
  • Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual.

1 Back
2 Adds bookmarks
3 Picture

4 Contents section
5 Directions of movement of contents section
6 Menu

Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed.

Additional methods of calling up the Digital Owner's Manual:

Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Owner's Manual by pressing and holding an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system:

Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster

LINGUATRONIC: call up via the voice control system

For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving.

Protection of the environment

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style

The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle.

Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the environment. Please observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style.

Operating conditions:

Make sure that the tyre pressure is correct.
Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).
Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection.

Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
Do not warm up the vehicle while stationary.
Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 23 of its maximum engine speed.
Switch off the vehicle in stationary traffic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.
Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Observe the ECO display for an economical driving style.

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles

EU countries only:

Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-Life Vehicles Directive.

A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources.

For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country.

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components

Mercedes-Benz AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the implied warranty is valid as for new parts.

Recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes-Benz AG.

NOTE Impairment of the operating efficiency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding

Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:

doors

• door pillars
  • Sill
• Seats
• Cockpit
• Instrument display
• Centre console
• lateral roof frame
  Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.
  ▶ Do not carry out repairs or welding.
  Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety that have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-critical systems (e.g. the brake system) may malfunction. Use only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Use only tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model.

Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conversion parts and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre.

Certain parts are officially approved for installation or modification only if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.

This is the case in the following situations:

• The vehicle type is different from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted.
  • Other road users could be endangered.
  • The exhaust gas or noise level gets worse.

Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) ( page 360) when ordering Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.

Owner's Manual

This Owner's Manual and the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle describe the following models and the standard and special equipment for your vehicle:

• The models and the standard and special equipment available at the time of this Owner's Manual going to press.
• The models and the standard and special equipment only available in certain countries.
• The models and the standard and special equipment, which will only be available at a later date.

Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at the time of delivery.

Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Please note that all speed specifications in these operating instructions are approximate and the values are subject to a certain tolerance.

The Owner's Manual, Supplement, further supplementary documents and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Mercedes me App

Notes about the on-demand feature

You can also activate various functions (on-demand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me after purchasing your vehicle.

Information is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Activating on-demand feature using Mercedes me

Requirements:

• The vehicle has a wireless connection.
- The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.

Ordering and activating on-demand feature

Add the desired on-demand feature for the vehicle to the shopping basket in the Mercedes me Store.
Complete the order. The on-demand feature is activated when operating the vehicle.

Speeding up activation

▶ Switch the vehicle off and lock it.
Unlock the vehicle after about two minutes and switch on the vehicle.
The on-demand feature has been activated. For some features, a notification also appears in the vehicle's multimedia system.

If the activation was not successful, repeat the process.

Operating safety

WARNING Risk of accident due to malfunctions or system failures

If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures.

Always have the prescribed service- and maintenance work or any required repairs carried out in a qualified workshop.

A WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to improper modifications to electronic components

Modifications to electronic components, their software or wiring can impair their functionality and/or the functionality of other networked components or safety-relevant systems.

This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety.

You must not tamper with wiring, electronic components, or their software.

▶ Always have work on electrical and electronic devices carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you modify the on-board electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid.

Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".

WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material coming into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system

If combustible materials, e.g. leaves, grass or twigs, come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they may ignite.

When driving off-road or on unpaved surfaces, check the underside of the vehicle at regular intervals.

In particular, remove any trapped parts of plants or other flammable material.

If damage should occur, immediately inform a qualified specialist workshop.

! NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension components

In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle:

• the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road
• the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pothole
• a heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components

In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tyres may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended.

If the underbody panelling is damaged, flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody panelling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

or

If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system

DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain individual high-voltage compo-

nents. These high-voltage components are under high voltage.

If you modify component parts of these high-voltage components or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted.

High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible.

▶ Never perform modifications to component parts of high-voltage components.
▶ Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components.
▶ Never touch component parts of high-voltage components after an accident.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high-voltage components. These components are marked with a high-voltage label:

All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on assembling the number plate on the front licence plate holder

NOTE Malfunctions and system failures due to incorrect assembly of the licence plate on the front licence plate holder

If the licence plate is incorrectly assembled on the front licence plate holder, sensors, cameras or driving and safety systems may malfunction or fail.

Observe the following points when assembling the licence plate on the front licence plate holder:

Assemble the licence plate directly on the licence plate holder without advertising media or other holders.
Assemble the licence plate so that it does not protrude above or to the side of the licence plate adapter.

Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries

Electromagnetic compatibility

The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation UN-R 10.

Vehicle installed radio components

Only for EU and EFTA countries and countries that recognise the EU manufacturer's declaration of conformity:

The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle:

The manufacturers of the wireless components ensure that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity are available at the following web address:

https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-conformity/en_GB/index.html

You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

For Israel only:

It is prohibited to make any change to a vehicle-installed radio component that could affect the wireless specifications of the device, including software changes, replacement of the original antenna, or adding the option to connect the device to an external antenna, without first obtain-

ing approval from the Communica-tions Ministry, because of concern about wireless interference.

For the United Kingdom only:

The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle:

The manufacturers of the radio components declare that all radio equipment installed in the vehicle is in compliance with the relevant statutory requirements. The full texts of the declarations of conformity are available at the following web address:

https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-conformity/en_GB/index.html

For Brazil only:

Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:

These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not cause interference in properly approved systems.

For Jamaica only:

All wireless vehicle components have received type approval from the SMA.

For Nigeria only:

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Connection and use of the radio communications equipment in this vehicle is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission

For Russia only:

The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all

wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

For Ukraine only:

The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that the wireless components installed in the vehicle com-

ply with the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Type of wireless applications and specifications in accordance with 2014/53/EU Besides the typical frequencies for mobile communication cars by Mercedes-Benz make use of the following automotive radio applications.

Type of wireless applications and specifications in accordance with 2014/53/EU

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength
Remote Keyless Entry 20 kHz (9-90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 105 kHz (90-119 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry 120 kHz (119-135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field s		strength
Wireless Power Transmission 127 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 66 dBμA/m at 10m with the magnetic field		strength level decreasing 3dB/octave above 119 kHz
Near-field communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire Pressure Monitoring	433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW ERP
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener	868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener	869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones 2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP
RLAN 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150–5250 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP
Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP
Remote Keyless Entry	7.25 GHz UWB (6.0–8.5 GHz) ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHzEIRP peak
76 GHz radar	76–77 GHz	≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP
Carsharing Module NFC:		NFC:≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 mBluetooth®:≤ +4 dBm (class 2)
	13.553-13.567 MHz
	Bluetooth®:2402-2480 MHz
Rear Seat Entertainment System	Bluetooth®:2400-2483.5 MHzWLAN 2.4 GHZ:2400-2483.5 MHzWLAN 5 GHz:5150-5250 MHz5725-5875 MHz	Bluetooth®:-0.8 dBmWLAN 2.4 GHZ:14.5 dBmWLAN 5 GHz:20.5 dBm13.3 dBm
Two-way radio (Tel7 telephone control unit) E-GSM	(900 MHz)GSM (1800 MHz)	+33 dBm+30 dBm
	UMTS (Band I, III, VIII) +24 dBm (+1/-3 dB)
	LTE (Band 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 28) +23 dBm (±2 dB)
HERMES (Hardware for Enhanced Remote, Mobility & Emergency Services)	WLAN (2400-2483.5 MHz)	< 20 dBm
	WLAN (5736-5833 MHz)	< 14 dBm
	GSM (E-GSM 900, Class 4)	< +33 dBm (±2 dB)
	GSM (E-GSM 1800, Class 1)	< +30 dBm (±2 dB)
	GSM (E-GSM 900 8-PSK, Class E2)	< +27 dBm (±3 dB)
	GSM (E-GSM 1800 8-PSK, Class E2)	< +26 dBm (±3 dB/-4 dB)
	UMTS (2100 WCDMA FDD B1, Class 3) < +24 dBm (±1 dB/-3 dB)
	LTE (FDD B I, B III, B38, B39, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±2 dB)
	GPS (1575,42 MHz +/- 2 MHz) Receiving only
RAMSES (Router And Mobile SEviceS) GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4)		< +32.5 dBm (±1 dB)
		< +29.5 dBm (±1 dB)
	UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class 3)	< +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)
	LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18, B19, B21, B28, Class 3)	< +23 dBm (±1 dB)
	LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
	GNSS (1559-1610 MHz) Receiving only
Information about the specific absorption rate For France only: The values have been determined and tested in accordance with the Décret n° 2019-1186 guideline regarding the indication of the specific absorption rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle components. Further information and updates are available at the following web address:	https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/baix/cars/SAR/fr_FR/index.html

Information about the specific absorption rate

Vehicle components SAR value in W/kg Applicable limit value
Compensator ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 < 0.2 W/kg 2 W/kg
DAI RSE 1.8 W/kg 2 W/kg
HERMES communication module < 0.4 W/kg 2 W/kg
RAMSES communication module 0.036 W/kg 2 W/kg
NRCS2P 0.003 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG6 0.199 W/kg 4 W/kg
NTG7 0.08 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7RSU 0.07 W/kg 2 W/kg
Tablet PC SM-T230NZ 0.7 W/kg 4 W/kg
Radio data transmission telephone system 0.24 W/kg 2 W/kg

Importer information for wireless components

For Moldova only:

Importer

S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova

mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2

For Turkey only:

Importer

Mercedes Benz Otomotiv Ticaret ve Hizmetler

A.Ş. Genel Merkez

Akçaburgaz Mah. Süleyman Şah Cad. No: 6/1

34522 Esenyurt/İstanbul

For Ukraine only:

Importer

PJSC "AUTOCAPITAL"

Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15/2

01004 Kyiv

Ukraine

For the United Kingdom only: Importer

Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited

Delaware Drive, Tongwell

Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA

England

Importer of Mercedes-Benz spare parts

Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics

Delaware Drive, Tongwell

Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA

England

Jack

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity

1.

The undersigned, representing

Manufacturer:

BRANO a.s.

herewith declares under our sole responsibility that the product:

1. a)

Name:

Jack

Type, Number:

A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18

B) A 240 580 00 18

C) A 639 580 02 18

D) A 639 580 03 18

E) A 910 580 00 00

F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00

Year of manufacture: 2020

Complies with all relevant provisions

Directive No. 2006/42/EC

b)

Description and purpose of use:

Car jack is intended solely for lifting of the concrete car, in accordance with the instruction label on the car jack.

3.

References of harmonized and other standards or specifications

ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, AS 2693, DBL

8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL

8451.15, MBN 10435,

Technical documentation of the product is stored at the premise of the manufacturer. The person responsible for assembling the technical docu-

mentation of the product: Head of the Technical Department Brano a.s.

4.

Hradec nad Moravici

Place

5.

05.10.2020

Date

Engineer Petr Petr

[Signature]

Director of division ZZ

TREFIT kit

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity

In accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/EC

We hereby declare that the product

Product designation: Daimler electric air pump

Model designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046 IBK-LK2

MB part no.: A 000 583 8200

complies with the following relevant regulations: 2014/30/EU

Applied harmonised standards, in particular:

DIN EN 55014-1:2012

Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH

Address: Offenbacher Landstrasse 8, 63456 Hanau

Authorised representative: IMS dept.

Date: December 2019

Signature: IMS-AE, IMS-AE-L

Diagnostics connection

The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, during repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic

devices should therefore only be connected in a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection

If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired.

For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection

Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.

▶ Check the charge level of the battery.
If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.

Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter ( page 157).

Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects:

• Malfunctions in the vehicle system
• Permanent damage to vehicle components

Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter.

Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop

A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant work. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:

• Safety-relevant work
  • Service and maintenance work
• Repair work
• Modifications as well as installations and conversions
  • Work on electronic components

- Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: work on the high-voltage component of the 48 V on-board electrical system

Mercedes-Benz recommends a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Vehicle registration

Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection.

Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registration data.

It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases:

• if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer.
• if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for example.

Correct use of the vehicle

If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.

Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle:

• the safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehicle-specific supplements and further supplementary documents
  • technical data for the vehicle
• traffic rules and -regulations
• laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles

Information on the REACH regulation

EU and EFTA countries only:

the REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to supply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs).

Mercedes-Benz AG acts to the best of its knowledge to prevent these SVHCs from being used and to enable customers to safely handle these substances. There are SVHCs known to Mercedes-Benz AG, according to supplier information and internal product information, found in individual components of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight.

Further information can be obtained at the following addresses:

• https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/
• https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids

Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers.

In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.

For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used:

• Medical aids malfunctioning
- Adverse health effects

Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components.

Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop:

• vehicle components carrying live voltage

• transmission aerials
  • multimedia system and sound system

If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Implied warranty

NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions.

Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions.

This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New- or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

▶ Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage.

QR code for rescue card

QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the routing of the electric lines) in compact form.

Further information can be obtained at https://www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code

Data storage

Data processing in the vehicle

Electronic control units Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle. Control units process data which, forexample, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate them- selves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions.

The following provides you with general information regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.

Personal data

Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identification number can be used by, forexample, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the licence plate number.

Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, forexample, your driving behaviour, your location, your route or your use patterns.

Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data

If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide governmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. Forexample, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offence.

Governmental entities are themselves, in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework, authorised to read out data from the vehicle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, forexample.

Operational data in the vehicle

This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units.

This includes the following data, forexample:

- vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display

- ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor

Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data memories for vehicle keys, forexample. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or faults.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data are stored:

• operating status of system components, suchas fill levels, tyre pressure or battery status
• malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes
• system reactions in special driving situations, such as airbag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems
  • information on events leading to vehicle damage

In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only temporarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, forexample.

If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures.

In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, forexample, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims.

Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.

Convenience and infotainment functions

You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, forexample:

• seat and steering wheel positions
• suspension and climate control settings
  • individual settings, such as interior lighting

Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, forexample:

• multimedia data, such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system
• address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system
• entered navigation destinations
  • data about the use of Internet services

These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time.

This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services in accordance with the settings that you have selected.

Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®)

If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Owner's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system.

This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone.

Online services

Wireless network connection

If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, forexample, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's services

Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, forexample, in the Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and

used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, forexample, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given.

You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.

Third party services

If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged.

For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data.

Data protection rights

Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection officers.

At a workshop, forexample, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

Copyright

Information on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Restraint system

Protection provided by the restraint system

The restraint system includes the following components:

• Seat belt system
• Airbags
• Child restraint system
• Child seat anchors

The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected.

A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:

• Fasten seat belts correctly.
• Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest.
• Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible.
• Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.

Limitations of the protection provided by the restraint system

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system

Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system.

▶ Never alter the parts of the restraint system.
▶ Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software.

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving aids which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Restraint system functionality

When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.

Malfunctioning restraint system

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system if:

• the restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on
• the restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Function of the restraint system in an accident

How the restraint system works depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident:

• Frontal impact
• Rear impact
• Side impact
• Rollover

The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision.

Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci-

sive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment.

The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration.

Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other:

• Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover
• Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact
• Knee airbag: frontal impact
• Side airbag: side impact
• Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact

- PRE-SAFE ^ Impulse Side: side impact

The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct ( page 50).

WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag components

The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has been deployed.

Do not touch the airbag parts.
Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed.

If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released:

• The bang will not generally affect your hearing.
- In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.

Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

Seat belts

Protection provided by the seat belt

Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function.

In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.

▶ Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

Always observe the instructions about the correct driver's seat position and adjusting the seat ( page 98).

In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:

• The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across the body.
• The seat belt must be routed across the centre of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible.
• The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back.

• Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.

• Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoulder section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen.
  Pregnant women must also take particular care with this.

• Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects.
• Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
• Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants.
  Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.

If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" ( page 55).

Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads ( page 112).

Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position

The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.

In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

A WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature

Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system.

Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts

Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations:

• the seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
• the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
• modifications have been made to the seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.

Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified seat belt tensioners could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended.

▶ Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.
Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.
Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners

Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function.

Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.

NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt

If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.

Fastening and adjusting seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Always engage seat belt tongue ① of the seat belt into seat belt buckle ② of the corresponding seat.
To adjust the seat belt height: press button 3 on the seat belt outlet and slide the seat belt outlet to the desired position.
To engage the seat belt outlet: release button ③ and ensure that the seat belt outlet engages.

A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt ( page 42).

NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled

When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the seat belt tensioner.

▶ Only buckle the seat belts as intended.

i Observe the notes on stowage areas ( page 112). Information on fitting a child restraint system and on children travelling in the vehicle can be found in the "Children in the vehicle" section ( page 59).

Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: after a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting.

You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system ( page 45).

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle

▶ Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.

Releasing seat belts

Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.

Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger

The 4 seat belt warning lamp in the Instrument Display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. In addition, a warning tone may sound.

As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.

Function of the rear seat belt status display

The rear seat belt status display is only available for certain countries.

When the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened.

You can immediately dismiss the rear seat belt status display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel ( page 251).

If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in the rear while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again.

In addition, a warning tone may sound. In this case, the rear seat belt status display cannot be hidden using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.

Airbags

Overview of airbags

① Knee airbag
② Driver's airbag
3 Front passenger airbag
4 Window airbag
5 Side airbag

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol.

When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant.

Potential protection provided by each airbag:

• Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg
• Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage
• Window airbag: head
• Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.

NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 71). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 70).

Information on the automatic front passenger air-bag shutoff

Only when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off can the front passenger airbag deploy in the event of an accident. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct ( page 50).

NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied

In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if:

• There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat.
• The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
  Stow objects in a suitable place.

Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.

Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.

Protection provided by the airbags

Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a correctly fastened seat belt.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function.

Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following:

- Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure

that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen.

• Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags.
• Observe the following information.
  Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.

To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular:

• Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible.
  When doing so, always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position ( page 98).

• Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed.

• Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags.

• The occupants must always keep their feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.
• If children are travelling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes ( page 55).
  • Always stow and secure objects correctly.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the following in particular:

• There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag.
• There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar).

• There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.

• There are no accessories, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim.
  In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.

• There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

Limitations of the protection provided by airbags

WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the cover of an airbag

If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer function as intended.

▶ Never modify the cover of an airbag.
Do not attach any objects to the cover.

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol ( page 46).

Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag

Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the airbag.

The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even cause additional injuries to the vehicle occupants by deploying.

This may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat.

Always stow and secure objects correctly.
Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers

If you use unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do.

In addition, the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff could be restricted.

You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the corresponding seats by Mercedes-Benz.

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door

The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged.

▶ Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.

Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag

A deployed airbag no longer offers any protection.

Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.

Status of the front passenger front airbag

Function of the automatic front passenger air-bag shutoff

The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint system. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly.

A WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat

Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system.

Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.

When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat.

When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 71). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 70).

A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information:

- Fasten seat belts correctly (→ page 42).

• Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest.
• Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible.

The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the following situations:

- The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.

- The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat surface.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag

The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.

A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

• the classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
• the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
  • the person is seated correctly.
  Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, the classification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag.

Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ( page 50).

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps

Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side ( page 69).

Self-test of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

When the vehicle is switched on, both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps simultaneously light up during the self-test.

The status of the front passenger airbag is displayed after the self-test via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps:

• ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
  The indicator lamp goes out after 60 seconds.
• ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
• OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.

When the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator light may be lit continuously or off.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Status display

If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation.

After fitting a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.

WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.

The child could be struck by the airbag.

Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 70).

Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat.

Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat.

After fitting a forward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously

or be off. Always observe the following information.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward-facing child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could:

• come into contact with the vehicle interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example
• be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.

Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards

from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 70).

If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off, depending on the person's stature.

A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information:

- If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat.

Instead, they should use a rear seat.

- If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains off, depending on the classification.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the person of smaller stature should use a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.

WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

• The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
• The person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt.
• The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Child restraint system on the front passenger seat ( page 70)
• Suitable positioning of the child restraint system ( page 59)

PRE-SAFE® system

Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)

PRE-SAFE ^® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

PRE-SAFE ^® can implement the following measures independently of each other:

• Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
• Closing the side windows.
• Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof.
• Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position.
• Vehicles with multicontour seat: increasing the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest.
• PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on, generating a brief

noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing.

NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat

The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object.

Stow objects in a suitable place.

Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

You will need to perform certain settings yourself.

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.

Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-

emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other:

• Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
• Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a higher flashing frequency.
• Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is cancelled automatically when the vehicle pulls away.

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

System limits

The system will not initiate any action in the following situations:

• when reversing or
• when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact

The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations:

• whilst driving or
- when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist

Function of PRE-SAFE ^® Impulse Side

If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the centre of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant.

If PRE-SAFE ^® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual ( page 375) display message appears.

Safely transporting children in the vehicle

Always observe when children are travelling in the vehicle

Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recognise potential risks and avoid dangers if children are travelling in the vehicle ( page 55).

Be diligent

Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey.

Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant.

To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information:

• Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
• The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.

- The vehicle seat must be suitable for fitting a child restraint system ( page 59).

Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you fit a child restraint system to a rear seat.

The generic term child restraint system

The generic term child restraint system is used in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example:

• a baby car seat
  • a rearward-facing child seat
  • a forward-facing child seat
• a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide

Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.

The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.

Observe laws and legal requirements

Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.

Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test specifications and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

Only use approved child restraint systems

Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:

• UN-R44
  • UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)

Information on child restraint system approval categories and details on the approval label on the child restraint system ( page 60).

Detecting risks, avoiding danger

Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle

Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems:

• the ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings
• the vehicle's seat belt system
• the Top Tether anchorages

Fitting an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint system is preferred.

Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the child restraint system incorrectly.

When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system ( page 63).

Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system

It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint sys-

tem. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards.

Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.

Always secure a child restraint system correctly

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system

The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.

Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
▶ Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.

▶ Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
▶ Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.
Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle

If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted or not secured, it can become detached.

The child cannot then be protected or restrained as intended.

The unused child restraint system can be become detached and strike vehicle occupants.

Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

▶ Always fit child restraint systems correctly, even if they are transported unused in the vehicle.
- Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information:

• Fitting the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system to the rear seat ( page 63).
  Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat ( page 68).
  Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat ( page 71). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems ( page 70).

If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation ( page 50).

• Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
  • Also secure Top Tether if present.

Do not modify the child restraint system

WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the child restraint system

The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury.

▶ Never modify a child restraint system.
Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

Mercedes-Benz recommends Mercedes-Benz care products for cleaning child restraint systems recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition

A WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems

Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function.

It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained.

▶ Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident.
Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

Avoid direct sunlight

WARNING Risk of bums when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight

If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on metallic parts of the child restraint system.

Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example.
If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Observe when stopping or parking

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
• change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

Overview of recommended child restraint systems

Further information on the correct child restraint system can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

Securing with ISOFIX

Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approximately 15 months)

Type1	BABY SAFE plus
Size category E
Approval E1 04 301 146

Type1	BABY SAFE plus
Order number2	B6 6 86 8224
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer, 2 With colour code 9H95.

Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)

Type1	DUO plus
Size category B1
Approval E1 04 301 133
Order number2	A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 91195.

Securing with the vehicle seat belt

Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and approximately 6 months) and weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and approximately 15 months)

Type	BABY SAFE plus II
Approval E1 04 301 146
Order number2	A 000 970 38 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 91195.

Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)

Type	DUO plus
Approval E1 04 301 133
Order number2	A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer, 2 With colour code 9H95.

Weight category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from approximately 3 to 12 years)

Type	KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301 304
Order number2	A 000 970 49 02
Type1	AMG KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301 304
Order number2	A 000 970 33 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for fitting a child restraint system

Left/right rear seat

Preferred securing system:

ISOFIX child seat anchor (/ page 61)

or

i-Size child seat anchor (/ pag e 63)

Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 65).

Alternative securing system:

Vehicle seat belt (/ pag e 66)

Front passenger seat

Securing system:

Vehicle seat belt (/ pag e 66)

Be sure to observe:

R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 50).

R Notes on the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 49).

Centre rear seat

Securing system:

Vehicle seat belt (/ pag e 66)

Approval categories for child restraint systems

Only use approved child restraint systems

Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:

• UN-R44
  • UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)

Identification on the child restraint system Information about the approval category, weight category and approval number, forexample, is on the approval label on the child restraint system.

There may be further information such as the ISO-FIX size categories, depending on the approval category of the child restraint system.

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R44

Example of an approval label

- Universal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are approved for installation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF.

The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points.

• Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
• Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-specific" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Example of an approval label

- i-Size: child restraint systems in the "i-Size" category are approved for installation in vehicles with i-Size mounting brackets. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled i-U.

The identification i-U refers to i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points.

Observe the suitability of vehicle seats

Depending on the approval category, there are forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint systems. Their use can be restricted for certain vehicle seats:

• Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems ( page 61)
• Suitability of seats for securing i-Size child restraint systems ( page 63).
• Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems (→ page 66)

Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the left and right rear seats

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems.

The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 ( page 60). Attach only child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables.

Carry cot

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
F-ISO/L1 X
G-ISO/L2 X
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.

Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months)

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
E - ISO/R1 IL
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in 'Overview of the recommended child restraint systems', or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months)

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
E - ISO/R1 IL
D - ISO/R2 IL

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
C - ISO/R3 IL (1)
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.(1) When using a child restraint system of size class [ISO/R3], move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Weight group 1 (9–18 kg and approx. 9 months to 4 years)

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
D - ISO/R2 IL
C - ISO/R3 IL (1)
B - ISO/F2 IUF

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
B1 - ISO/F2X IUF
A - ISO/F3 IUF
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.(I) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching i-Size child restraint systems

i-Size is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems.

The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an i-Size child restraint system in accordance with UN R129 ( page 60). Child restraint systems that are permitted in accordance with UN R44 as per the ISO-FIX tables ( page 61) or UN R129 as per the following i-Size tables may be attached.

i-Size child restraint systems (ISO/R2, ISO/F2X, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)

Front passenger seat Left/right r ear seat
X i-U
X Not suitable for an i Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.	i U Suitable for forward facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.

Fitting the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the left and right rear seats

WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.

• As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
• Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
  Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the instrument display.

If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible.

WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded.

Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.

If the child is secured in an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system with integrated seat belts, the total mass of the child and child restraint system must not exceed 33 kg.

Always comply with the information about the mass of the child:

- in the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used

- on a label on the child restraint system, if present

Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with.

When fitting a child restraint system, observe the following:

√ Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system.

ISOFIX child seat anchor ( page 61) or

i-Size child seat anchor ( page 63)

√ Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

√ Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

When fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system, also observe the following:

√ When using a baby car seat in weight group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group 1 on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.

√ When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group 1: the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat.

☑ If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight group 2 or 3.

Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

√ The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing in the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

☑ The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

When fitting an i-Size child restraint system, also observe the following:

√ When using a rearward-facing child restraint system: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.

√ When using a forward-facing child restraint system: the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat.

① ISOFIX mounting bracket
i-Size mounting bracket

Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat during installation of the child restraint system

Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.

Remove and stow away covers ① or ②.
Attach the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.
After removing the child seat, reattach covers ① or ②.

Fastening a Top Tether

WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after Top Tether belts are fitted

The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving.

As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended protective function. This may also cause additional injuries.

▶ Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting Top Tether belts.
▶ Observe the lock verification indicator.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the instrument display.

If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible.

If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt:

The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

If necessary, slide head restraint ① upwards (→ page 103).
Fold up cover ② of Top Tether anchorage ③.
Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Guide Top Tether belt ④ under head restraint ① between the two head restraint bars.
Hook Top Tether hook ⑤ of Top Tether belt ④ into Top Tether anchorage ③ without twisting.
Tension Top Tether belt ④. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
Fold down cover ② of Top Tether anchorage ③.
If necessary, slide head restraint ① downwards (→ page 103). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt ④.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt
Notes on the suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems
Rear seats

Weight category 0: to 10 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat ^1	U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat ^1	U, L
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat ^1	U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1	U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1	U, L
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat.
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

- If it is absolutely necessary for you to fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 71).

- Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation ( page 50).

Front passenger seat

Weight category 0: to 10 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1	X
Front passenger airbag disabled1,2	U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1	X
Front passenger airbag disabled1,2	U, L
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1	UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled1,2	U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg

Front passenger airbag enabled1	UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled1.2	U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1	UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled1.2	U, L

1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger airbag shutoff. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
X Not suitable for children in this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat

WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.

• As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
• Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
  Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the instrument display.

If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible.

When fitting a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following:

√ Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.
Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" ( page 66).
When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.
√ The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.

☑ If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III.
Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing in the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
√ The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
√ Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat surface of the rear seat.

Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system.

The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet.

Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

Sticker visible when the front passenger door is open

Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side.

Make sure you observe the following information:

• Never fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat
• Always fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat

- Observe the overview on suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems ( page 66).

- Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat ( page 68).

- Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 70)

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.

The child could be struck by the airbag.

Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems ( page 71).

Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor

Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:

• If it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, always observe the information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff ( page 49).
• When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front

passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously ( page 50).

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is enabled. The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat

When fitting a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following:

☑ Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 70).
☑ Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.

Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" ( page 66).

When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.
If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle; this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III.

Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

√ The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat

cushion and/or be fitted facing in the wrong direction.

√ The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
√ Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.

WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system

Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff.

Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system.
Always make sure that the child restraint system is installed correctly.
Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.

Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment.
Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.
Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet.
If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

Child safety locks

Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors

WARNING Accident – and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are travelling in the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the "Notes on the additional door lock" section.

There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.

The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

Press the lever in direction ① (activate) or ② (deactivate).
Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.

Activating and deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows

To activate/deactivate: press button ②. The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases: • indicator lamp ① is lit: via the switch on the driver's door

- indicator lamp ① is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door

Notes on pets in the vehicle

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unattended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could press buttons or switches, for instance.

An animal may:

• activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
• switch systems on or off and endanger other road users

Unsecured animals may be thrown about the vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure vehicle occupants.

▶ Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle.
Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier.

Key

Overview of key functions

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields

Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields.

Vehicle key

1 Locking

2 Indicator lamp

3 Unlocking

4 Opens/closes the boot lid

If indicator lamp ② does not light up after pressing the ☑ or ☑ button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Replace the key battery ( page 77).

The key locks and unlocks the following components:

• Doors
• Fuel filler flap
• Boot lid

If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-theft protection is primed again.

Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the key's functionality.

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

Activate or deactivate Acoustic lock.

i Please observe:

The selected setting for the acoustic locking verification signal must comply with the relevant national road and traffic regulations. In some countries, including Germany, using the acoustic locking verification signal is forbidden by traffic laws (in accordance with §16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German national road traffic regulations). The driver of the vehicle must comply with these regulations. In countries where the use of this function is forbidden, this function is not activated in the vehicle and must not be activated.

Changing the unlocking settings

Possible unlocking functions of the key:

- Central unlocking

- Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap

To switch between settings: press the ☑ and ⏻ buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected:

• To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice.
• Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.

Deactivating the function of the key

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular key. Activate the function of the key so that all its functions will again be available.

You can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key if you

do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time.

Deactivate: Press ☐ and hold the key button.
With the key button ☐ pressed, immediately press key button ☐ twice in quick succession.
The indicator light of the key lights up once briefly and once for a long time.
To activate: press any button on the key.

When the vehicle is started with the key in the stowage compartment of the centre console, the function of the key is automatically activated ( page 154).

Removing/inserting the emergency key

Removing the emergency key

Press release button ①.
Emergency key ② is pushed out slightly.
Pull out emergency key ② until it engages in the intermediate position.
Press release button ① again and fully remove emergency key ②.

Inserting the emergency key

Press release button ①.

Insert emergency key ② to the intermediate position or fully until it engages.

You can use the intermediate position of emergency key ② to attach the key to a key ring.

Replacing the key battery

A DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, severe internal burns can occur within two hours.

There is a risk of fatal injury!

Keep the batteries out of the reach of children.
If the lid and/or the battery compartment do not close securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children.
If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, seek immediate medical attention.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

Requirements

• You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Remove the emergency key ( page 77).

Press release knob ② down fully and slide cover ① in the direction of the arrow.
Fold out cover ① in the direction of the arrow and remove.
Remove battery compartment ③ and take out the discharged battery.
Insert the new battery into battery compartment ③. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the battery when doing this.
▶ Push in battery compartment ③.
Re-attach cover ① and push it until it engages.

Problems with the key, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes:

• The key battery is weak or discharged.
Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 75).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 77).
▶ Use the replacement key.
Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( page 82).
Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source

Possible causes if the function of the key is impaired:

• high voltage power lines
- mobile phones
• electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)

• shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers
  Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.

You have lost a key

Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.

If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well.

Doors

Notes on the additional door lock

The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom.

WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional door lock is activated

If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

▶ Never leave persons, in particular children, unattended in the vehicle.
If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the additional door lock.

The additional door lock is automatically activated in the following situations:

• The vehicle is locked using the key.
• The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.

If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door lock is not activated ( page 287).

If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside.

i After locking you can issue a signal with the horn.

You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating interior protection before locking the vehicle ( page 97).

Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the additional door lock ( page 78).

Pull the door ② handle. Locking pin ① pops up when the door is unlocked.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

To unlock: press ① button.
To lock: press button 2.

This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.

The vehicle is not unlocked:

• if you have locked the vehicle using the key
- if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO

Requirements:

• The key is outside the vehicle.
- The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
- The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is used are closed.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the boot lid

• when using an automatic car wash
• when using a high pressure cleaner
  ▶ Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.

or

Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.

Observe the notes:

• on washing the vehicle in a car wash ( page 311)
• on using a high pressure cleaner ( page 312)

To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.
To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface ① or ②.
▶ Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface ② until the closing process has been completed.
(i) Further information on convenience closing ( page 90).

If you open the boot lid from outside, the boot lid is automatically unlocked.

Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Possible causes:

• The function of the key has been deactivated.
• The key battery is weak or discharged.
▶ Activate the function of the key ( page 76).
Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 75).

Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 77).
▶ Use the replacement key.
Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( page 82).
Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source

Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired:

• high voltage power lines
- mobile phones
• electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
• shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers
Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.

Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature

The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

To activate: press and hold button ② for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

To deactivate: press and hold button Ⓞ for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated:

• while the vehicle is being tow-started or pushed
• if the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer

Power closing function

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically

Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries.

▶ Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area.
▶ Automatic closing of the doors can be cancelled by pulling the outer or inner door handle.

If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock.

Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key

If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's door using the emergency key.
If you unlock and open the driver's door with the emergency key, this triggers the burglar alarm system.

Remove the emergency key ( page 77).
Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening ① in the cover.
▶ Pull and hold the door handle.
Pull the cover on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.
Release the door handle.

To unlock: turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position 1.
To lock: tum the emergency key clockwise to position 1.
Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated firmly.

Boot

Opening the boot lid

DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.
▶ Never drive with the boot lid open.

NOTE Damage to the boot lid by obstacles above the vehicle

The boot lid swings upwards when it is opened.

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid.

With the boot lid unlocked, press the top of the Mercedes star.

To open, pull on the folded-out Mercedes star when the reversing camera is activated.
▶ Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper ( page 86).
Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing

Pull remote operating switch ① until the boot lid opens.

or

Press and hold the 📋 button on the key. If the boot lid is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open.
With the boot lid opening limiter activated, manually pull the stopped boot lid upwards.

If an obstacle obstructs the boot lid during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the boot lid. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

Closing the boot lid

WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the boot lid: your vehicle is equipped with automatic key recognition. If a key belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle, the boot lid will not be locked and will pop open again.

Note that the boot lid will not be locked if the following situation occurs:

• You have locked the vehicle and close the boot lid while a key belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle.
  and
• A second key belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle.

Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

Before locking, ensure that at least one key belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.
To close the boot lid: pull the boot lid downwards using the handle recess and push it closed.

Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid

Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area.

Make sure that nothing is located within the vicinity of the closing area.
▶ Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:
- Press the 📞 button on the key.
- Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
- Press the closing or locking button on the boot lid.

- Press the top of the star on the boot lid.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper.

To close the boot lid: pull the boot lid downwards using the handle recess and push it closed.
If the boot lid is stopped in an intermediate position, push it downwards.
The boot lid will continue to close.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Push remote operating switch ① until the boot lid is fully closed.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Press closing button Ⓞ on the boot lid. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

Press locking button ② on the boot lid. If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the boot lid will close and the vehicle will be locked.

With the boot lid completely open, press and hold the 📞 button on the key. The key must be in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS

With the boot lid completely open, make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper ( page 86).

Boot lid automatic reversing function

The boot lid is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the boot lid during the automatic closing process, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

The reversing function will not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
• towards the end of the closing procedure

In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped.

▶ Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped, use one of the following options:
- Press the button on the key.
- Press the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
- Press the closing or locking button on the boot lid.
- Press the top of the Mercedes star on the boot lid.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or interrupt boot lid movement by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately.

Observe the notes when opening ( page 83) and closing ( page 83) the boot lid.

i A warning tone sounds while the boot lid is opening or closing.

WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system

The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system.

Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the boot lid

• when using an automatic car wash
• when using a high pressure cleaner
  ▶ Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.

OR

Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.

When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.

Observe the following notes:

• The key is behind the vehicle.
- Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement.
- Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement.
- Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly.
- The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again.

① Detection range of the sensors

If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases:

• The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow.
• The kicking movement is made using a prosthetic leg.

The boot lid could be opened or closed unintentionally, in the following situations:

• A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects.
• Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. the hose of a fuel dispenser, a charging cable or luggage
• Clamping straps, tarpaulins or other coverings are pulled over the bumper.
• A protective mat with a length reaching over the boot sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used.
  • The protective mat is not secured correctly.
• Work is being done on the trailer hitch, trailers or rear bicycle racks.

Deactivate the function of the key ( page 76) or do not carry the key about your person in such situations.

Switching separate boot locking on or off

If you centrally unlock the vehicle while separate locking is activated, the boot will remain locked.

To switch on: slide the switch to position 1.
To switch off: slide the switch to position 2.
If an accident has been detected, the boot will unlock even if separate locking is switched on.

Side windows

Opening and closing the side windows

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window

When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.
If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window

When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process.

When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows

Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended.

Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Requirements:

- The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.

Closing
2 Opening

The buttons on the driver's door take precedence.

To start automatic operation: press the button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the ☐ button again.

When the vehicle is switched off, you can continue to operate the side windows.

This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened.

Automatic reversing function of the side windows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window

The reversing function does not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
- during resetting.

The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone becomes trapped, press the button to open the side window again.

Automatic function of the side windows

In the following cases, the side windows will be closed automatically when the vehicle is switched off:

• if it starts to rain
  Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.
  • in extreme temperatures
• after a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage)
  • if there is a malfunction in the power supply

The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position.

Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the side windows will be closed completely if the sliding sunroof is open.

If the side windows are obstructed during automatic closing, the side window concerned will open again slightly. After another automatic closing process, the automatic function may be deactivated. After about ten seconds, the automatic function is active again.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

Requirements:

• The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
  Press and hold the 📊 button on the key. The following functions are performed:

• The vehicle is unlocked.

• The side windows are opened.

• The sliding sunroof is opened.

- The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.

To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.
To continue convenience opening: press and hold the button again.

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)

WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing

When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof.

When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

Requirements:

- The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.

Press and hold the ⏻ button on the key. The following functions are performed:

• The vehicle is locked.
• The side windows are closed.
• The sliding sunroof is closed.

To interrupt convenience closing: release the button.
To continue convenience closing: press and hold the ☑ button again.
(i) Convenience closing also functions with KEY-LESS-GO ( page 80).

Resolving problems with the side windows

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
Adjust the side windows.

Adjusting the side windows

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:

Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment).
The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:

Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature.

Possible causes:

• The key battery is weak or discharged.
Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 75).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 77).

Sliding sunroof

Opening and closing the sliding sunroof

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement.

During opening and closing, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
▶ Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.

WARNING Risk of entrapment if the sliding sunroof is operated by children

Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the ley with you and lock the vehicle.

NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice

Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction.

Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice.

NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects

Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals.

Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.

NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is fitted

When a roof luggage rack is fitted, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be restricted.

▶ Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is fitted.
If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Raise

Open

Close/lower

Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is fitted.

To start automatic operation: press or pull the button beyond the point of resistance and release it.
To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stopped.

Automatic reversing function of the sliding sun-roof

If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active

In particular, the reversing function does not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.

• towards the end of the closing procedure.

- to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. - towards the end of the closing procedure.

• during resetting.
During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
▶ Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof

The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically when the vehicle has been switched off in the following situations:

• if it starts to rain
  Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the wind-screen.
  • in extreme temperatures
  • after a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage)

• if there is a malfunction in the power supply

The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the vehicle interior.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, the roof will be opened again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated.

Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again

If the sliding sunroof is closed again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.

Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or

▶ Briefly press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly:

Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.

Vehicles without a panorama sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof is not operating smoothly.

Reset the sliding sunroof.

Resetting the sliding sunroof

Push the button up to the point of resistance repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is fully open.
Press the button for another second.
▶ Close the sliding sunroof.

Roller sunblinds

Extending or retracting the rear-window roller sun-blind

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind

Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of movement.

▶ Ensure there are no body parts in the range of movement.
If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button again.
The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position.

NOTE Damage caused by objects

Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction.

Do not place any objects on the rear shelf.
Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely.

To extend or retract: press button ①.

Function of the immobiliser

The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key.

The immobiliser is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched off, and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Function of the ATA system

If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations:

• when a door is opened
• when the boot lid is opened
• when the bonnet is opened
• when interior protection is triggered (→ page 96)
• when tow-away protection is triggered (→ page 95)

The ATA system is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situations:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Indicator lamp ① flashes when the ATA system is primed.

The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations:

• after unlocking the vehicle with the key
• after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
- after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (→ page 154)

Deactivating the ATA

Press the ☑, ☒ or ☑ button on the key.

or

▶ Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 154)

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO

▶ Grasp the outside door handle with the key outside the vehicle.

Function of tow-away protection

An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed.

Tow-away protection is automatically primed after approximately 60 seconds:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Tow-away protection is only primed when the following components are closed:

• Doors
• Boot lid

Tow-away protection is automatically deactivated:

• after pressing the ☑ or ☑ button on the key
• after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 154)
  • after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
• when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle ( page 180).

Priming/deactivating tow-away protection

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Quick access

▶ Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection.

Tow-away protection is primed again in the following cases:

• The vehicle is unlocked again.
- A door is opened.
• The vehicle is locked again.

If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to prime or deactivate tow-away protection.

Function of interior protection

When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior.

Interior protection is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Interior protection is only primed when the following components are closed:

• Doors
• Boot lid

Interior protection is automatically deactivated:

• after pressing the ☑ or ☑ button on the key
• after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 154)
  • after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
• when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

The following situations can lead to a false alarm:

• when there are moving objects such as mascots in the vehicle interior
• if a side window is open
• if the sunroof is open

Priming/deactivating interior protection

Multimedia system:

Settings

Quick access

▶ Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor.

Interior protection is primed again in the following cases:

• The vehicle is unlocked again.
• A door is opened.
• The vehicle is locked again.

If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to prime or deactivate interior protection.

Notes on the correct driver's seat position

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel ①, seat belt ② and driver's seat ③:

• You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration:
  • You are sitting in an upright position

• Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion

• Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly

• The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint
• You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
  • You can move your legs freely
• You can see all the displays on the instrument display clearly
• You have a good overview of the traffic conditions
• Observe the notes on correctly fastening the seatbelt ( page 42).

Notes on grab handles

WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries.

Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.

Seats

Adjusting the front seat manually and electrically

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can adjust the seats when the ignition is switched off.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".

WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged

The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving.

This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.

Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

▶ Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position

The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat

Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system.

Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat.

① Seat cushion inclination
② Seat height
3 Seat backrest inclination
④ Seat fore-and-aft position
5 Seat cushion length

To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever ④ and slide the seat into the desired position.

Make sure that the seat is engaged.
To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever 5 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support: Using buttons ① to ④, adjust the contour of the backrest individually to suit your back.

Adjusting the front seat electrically

4 Seat cushion length
5 Seat cushion inclination
6 Seat fore-and-aft position

Save the settings with the memory function ( page 111).

Head restraints

Adjusting the front seat head restraints manually

① Higher
② Softer
3 Lower
4 Firmer

① Head restraint height
② Seat backrest inclination
3 Seat height

A WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

To raise: pull the head restraint up.
To lower: press release knob ① in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards.
To move backwards: press release knob and push the head restraint backwards.
Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints manually

To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: pull or push right or left side bolster 2.
To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards.
To move backwards: press release knob and push the head restraint backwards.
Ensure that the head restraint is engaged correctly.

Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats manually

To raise: pull the head restraint up.
To lower: press release knob ① in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

Configuring the seat settings

Multimedia system:

→ Comfort ▶ Seat comfort

Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar)

Select Lumbar.
Select the settings 🙏 for the desired seat.
Adjust the air cushions.
Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
▶ Select Side bolsters.
Adjust the air cushions for the desired seat.
Setting the seat heating balance
▶ Select Seat heating balance.
Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat.

Setting automatic seat adjustment

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile

Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.

Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.
If a person is in danger of becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by:
a) Tapping the warning message on the media display.
or
b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped.

Requirements:

- Adapting the driver's seat position to body size: automatic seat adjustment has been switched on.

Multimedia system:

Settings

'ehicle

Automatic seat adjustment

Switching automatic seat adjustment on/off When the active user profile is changed while the vehicle is stationary, the driver's seat, outside mirrors and seat contour will automatically be adapted to the driver.

Select On or Off.

This setting is available only for individual user profiles. For the guest profile, automatic seat adjustment cannot be switched on or off.

Adjusting the driver's seat position to body size The vehicle will calculate a suitable driver's seat position on the basis of the driver's body size and set this directly.

To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in.

Set the size using the scale.

Select Start positioning.

The driver's seat position will be adjusted to the body size that has been set.

If the driver's seat position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be changed manually at any time via the buttons.

The exterior mirrors are not set via this function. Instead, they have to be set manually via the switches.

You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me portal for your user profile. By synchronising the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronising user profiles.

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Activate or deactivate the function.

If you use an individual user profile and have set your body size, this information is carried over for the easy entry and exit feature. This causes the driver's seat to automatically move into the correct position.

Overview of massage programmes

• Hot Relaxing back Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area.
• Hot Relaxing shoulder Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area.
• Activating Massage Activating massage programme with upward-moving relaxing waves.
  • Classic Massage Calming back massage programme.

• Wave Massage Regenerating massage programme via relaxing waves across the back and in the seat cushion.

• Mobilizing Massage Mobilising massage programme with upward-moving relaxing waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain.

• Active Workout backrest and Active Workout cushion These programmes require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it.

Selecting the massage programme for the front seats

Multimedia system:

▶ Start the programme for the desired
seat ▶.
To set the massage intensity: switch High intensity on or off.

Resetting seat settings

Multimedia system:

→ Comfort ▶ Seat comfort

Select ← for the desired seat.

Confirm the prompt.

Switching the seat heating on/off

WARNING Risk of bums due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot.

In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly.

NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heater is switched on

When the seat heater is switched on, overheating may occur due to objects or documents placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface.

Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heater is switched on.

Requirements:

• The power supply is switched on.

Press button ① repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.

The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating is switched off.

① Vehicles with the Warmth Comfort Package: you can heat the armrests in the door and the centre console. You can also set the panel heating in the multimedia system ( page 107).

Setting the panel heating

Multimedia system:

When the seat heater is switched on, the armrests and the centre console can be heated.

Switch the function for the desired seats on or off.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Requirements:

• The power supply is switched on.

Press button ① repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.

Steering wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel manually

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Unlocking

Adjust height ② and distance ③ to the steering wheel.

Locking

Fold release lever ① up as far as it will go.
Check and make sure that the steering column is locked by moving the steering wheel.

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.

Fold release lever ① down as far as it will go.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

To adjust the distance to the steering wheel
To adjust the height
Save the settings with the memory function ( page 111).

Switching the steering wheel heater on/off

Requirements:

- The power supply or the ignition is switched on.

Turn the lever in the direction of arrow ① or ②. If indicator lamp ③ lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on.

When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heater will switch off.

Easy entry and exit feature

Using the easy entry and exit feature

WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature

You could lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the easy entry and exit feature

You and other vehicle occupants, particularly children, may become trapped.

Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the range of movement of the steering wheel and driver's seat.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel:

Move the steering wheel adjustment lever. The adjustment process is stopped.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat:

Press the switch for seat adjustment. The adjustment process is stopped.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature

Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry and exit feature, particularly when unattended.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the ley with you and lock the vehicle.

If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driver's seat will move back in the following situations:

• You switch off the vehicle when the driver's door is open.
• You open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched off.

The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range.

The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last driving position in the following cases:

• You switch the power supply or the vehicle on when the driver's door is closed.
• You close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on.

The last drive position will be saved when:

• You switch off the vehicle.
- Vehicles with memory function: you call up the seat settings via the memory function.
- Vehicles with memory function: you save the seat settings via the memory function.

Vehicles with memory function: press one of the memory function position switches to stop the adjustment process.

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

▶ Automatic seat adjustment

Easy Entry/Exit

Activate or deactivate the function.

Memory function

Function of the memory function

WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving

If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.

Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

A WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function

When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped.

During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjustment switch immediately.

WARNING Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by children

When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped, especially if they are unsupervised.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off. Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save settings for the following systems:

• Seat, backrest and head restraint
• Steering wheel
• Outside mirrors
• Head-up display

Operating the memory function

Storing

Set the desired position for all systems.
Briefly press the M memory button and then press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.

To call up: press or briefly hold preset position button 1, 2 or 3. After releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position.

Stowage areas

Notes on loading the vehicle

DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.
▶ Never drive with the boot lid open.

WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip

over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

WARNING Risk of accident from objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell or front-passenger footwell.
Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient clearance for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not lay multiple floor mats on top of one another.

Vehicles with automatic front-passenger airbag shutoff: Objects trapped under the front-passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front-passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front-passenger airbag shutoff ( page 49).

WARNING - Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion

The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion.

If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

NOTE Damage to the cup holder

The cup holder can be damaged when folding back the rear seat armrest. When open, the cup holder can be damaged by body weight.

The rear seat armrest can only be folded back when the cup holder is closed.
Do not sit or support yourself on the cup holder when it is open.

NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight

When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight.

Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest.

! NOTE Damage to the handle in the boot floor

If the handle in the boot is left protruding, the handle may be damaged.

Before closing the boot lid, detach the handle and press it down closed again.

NOTE Damage to the stowage compartment under the ashtray due to intense heat

The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it.

Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged.

WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter

You can suffer burns if you touch the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter.

In addition, flammable materials can catch fire if:

• you drop the hot cigarette lighter.
  • children e.g. hold the hot cigarette lighter to objects.
  Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
  Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of the reach of children.
  ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact

with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.

Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties, e. g. differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. What's more, leather is subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change.

The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle:

- Do not exceed the permissible total mass or the permissible axle loads of the vehicle (including load and occupants).

information can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 360).

• The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
• Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.
• Secure the load using the lashing eyelets and distribute the load evenly.

Notes on driving with a roof load

• Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 112).
• Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.
• When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs E and C. These are designed to focus on stability ( page 164).

For more information on stowage compartments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual.

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

Overview of the front stowage compartments

① Stowage spaces in the doors
2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with USB ports and stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player
3 Stowage compartment in the front centre console with a USB port
4 Glove compartment

Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold)

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats

When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.

When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury if the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

Rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest can fold forwards.

- As a result, the vehicle occupant is pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function and could cause additional injuries.

• Objects or loads in the boot cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
  Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.

If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back into place.

Requirements:

- The area into which the seat backrest is folded is clear.

- The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully inserted.

Folding the left and right seat backrests forwards. You can fold the centre and outer seat backrests forwards separately.

▶ Vehicles without a memory function: move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.

▶ Vehicles with a memory function: if at least one section of the rear seat backrest is folded forwards, the corresponding front seat will move forwards slightly, if necessary, to avoid a collision.
If necessary, fully insert the head restraints in the rear seat backrest.
Pull release lever 1. The corresponding seat backrest will fold forwards.

Folding the centre seat backrest forwards

Ensure that the centre seat backrest has been unlocked.

Pull release catch ③ for seat backrest ② forwards.
Fold the corresponding seat backrest forwards.

Folding back the rear seat backrest

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats

When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.

When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat back-rest

The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back.

Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back the seat backrest.

▶ Vehicles without a memory function: move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.

▶ Vehicles with a memory function: if at least one section of the seat backrest is folded back, the corresponding front seat will automatically return to the most recent original position.

Fold the corresponding seat backrest ① back until it engages. Left and right seat backrests: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, this

will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

Centre seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator ② will be visible.

Locking the release catch of the centre rear seat backrest

Requirements

- The left and centre seat backrests are engaged and joined together.

You can lock the centre seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the boot against unauthorised access. The centre seat backrest can then be folded forwards only together with the left seat backrest.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Fold the centre and left seat backrests forwards.
To lock or unlock: slide catch ① upwards or downwards.

Overview of the tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 112).

① Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat)

Using the bag hooks

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects

The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage.

Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants.

Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
▶ Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks.

Pull the bag hook ② down by the tab ①.
i Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 112).

Attaching the luggage net

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

▶ Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
▶ Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

▶ Vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat: fold up the tie-down eyes.
Hook luggage net ① into the front and rear tie-down eyes.
▶ Vehicles without a through-loading feature in the rear bench seat; hook the rings into the luggage net's hooks on the boot floor.

Lift the rings slightly and hook luggage net hooks ① into the post.

Attaching a roof luggage rack

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load

The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter.

If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.

▶ Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

Observe the signposted headroom clearance.

If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.

Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks

The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

▶ Use only roof luggage racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is fitted.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the boot lid can be fully opened when the roof luggage rack is fitted.

▶ Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

NOTE Damage to the covers

The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened.

Do not use metallic or hard objects.

Carefully fold covers ① upwards in the direction of the arrow.

Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers ①.
Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer.
▶ Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.

Sockets

Using the 12 V socket

Requirements

- Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A).

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has a 12 V socket in the stowage compartment in the front centre console. In addition, depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has a 12 V socket in the stowage compartment in the rear centre console.

Example: 12 V socket in the stowage compartment in the front centre console

Briefly press the trim element of the cover on the front. The cover opens in the direction of the arrow.
Lift up cap ① of the socket and insert the plug of the device.

If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open.

Using the 230 V socket in the rear passenger compartment

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to damage from a connecting cable or socket

You could receive an electric shock when pulling the connecting cable or the 230 V power socket out of the trim, or if it is damaged or wet.

▶ Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage.
When the vehicle is switched off, make sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.
Immediately have the 230 V power socket checked or replaced at a qualified specialist workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
▶ Never plug the connecting cable into a 230 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

DANGER Risk of death due to using the socket incorrectly

In particular, you could receive an electric shock:

• if you touch the inside of the socket
- if you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket
Do not touch the inside of the socket.
Only connect suitable devices to the socket.

Make sure that no liquids get into the 230 V socket.

When the 230 V socket is not in use, keep the socket flap closed.

Requirements:

• The device is equipped with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in.
• A device up to a maximum of 150 W (0.65 A) is used.
• Do not use multiple socket outlets.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Open socket flap 3.

Insert the plug of the device into 230 V socket

When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp ② lights up.

USB port in the rear passenger compartment

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the design of the stowage compartment and the number of USB ports in the rear centre console may vary.

When the vehicle is switched on, you can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB port using a suitable charging cable.

When the vehicle is switched on, the devices can be charged with 5 V (up to 3 A).

Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial

Notes on wirelessly charging a mobile phone

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
▶ Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

A WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment

Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could constitute a fire hazard.

Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, especially those made of metal.

NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stowage compartment

If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic fields.

Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone stowage compartment.

NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stow-age compartment caused by liquids

If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.

▶ Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment.

The following notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone must be observed:

• Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module.
• The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the vehicle is switched on.
• Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment.
• Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial.
• The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may particularly depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background.
• To ensure more efficient charging and connection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone.

Protective covers which are necessary for wireless charging are an exception.

- When charging, the mat should be used if possible.

Charging a mobile phone wirelessly

Requirements:

• The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone).
  A list of Qi-compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com.

Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat ① as possible with the display facing upwards.
When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged.
Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the central display.

The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

Radio equipment approval numbers for Brazil

This device operates on a secondary basis, that is to say it has no protection against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis.

This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure defined in Directive 242/2000 by the Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets the applicable technical requirements.

Further information is available on the ANATEL website. www.anatel.gov.br

▶ Further information on the declaration of conformity for vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves.

Fitting/removing the floor mats

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

Fitting floor mats

Remove the floor mat.

Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell.
Press studs ① onto holders ②.
Adjust the corresponding seat.

Removing floor mats

Pull the floor mat off holders ②.

Exterior lighting

Notes on adjusting the lights when driving abroad

Vehicles with static LED headlamps: it is not necessary to convert the headlamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries in which traffic drives on the other side of the road.

Vehicles with Intelligent Light System: before crossing the border into countries in which traffic drives on the other side of the road, it is necessary to set the headlamps to symmetrical low beam ( page 134).

Once the headlamps have been converted:

• Oncoming traffic will not be dazzled.
• The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high.
• The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be available.

The headlamps must be reset to asymmetrical low beam when you return from abroad.

Information about lighting systems and your responsibility

The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.

Light switch

Operating the light switch

1 ←P← Left-hand parking lights
2 P←→ Right-hand parking lights
3 200≤ Standing lights and licence plate lighting
4 AUTO Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position)

5 Low beam/high beam
6 0‡ Switches the rear fog light on/off.

When low beam is activated, the 5 indicator lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated and replaced by the low-beam indicator lamp.

Always park your vehicle safely using sufficient lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations.

NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights

Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery.

Where possible, switch on the right P or left P parking light.

For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer than 6 m, single-sided parking lighting is not permitted in some countries. In this case, the standing lights are also switched on in the parking lights position.

If the battery is insufficiently charged, the standing lights or parking lights will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.

The exterior lighting (except standing and parking lights) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened.

- Observe the notes on surround lighting ( page 134).

Automatic driving lights function

When the vehicle is switched on, the standing lights, low beam and daytime running lights will be switched on automatically depending on the light conditions.

WARNING Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched off in poor visibility

When the light switch is set to AUTO, the dipped beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray.

In such cases, turn the light switch to 📋D.

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for the vehicle lighting.

Switching the rear fog light on/off

Requirements:

- The light switch is in the ☑ or AUTO position.

Press button 0¢

Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.

Operating the combination switch for the lights

High beam
② Turn signal light, right
3 Headlamp flashing
4 Turn signal light, left
Use the combination switch to select the desired function.

Switching on high beam

Turn the light switch to the ☐ or AUTO position.
Push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ①. When high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam ⚡D will be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam ⚡D.

Switching off high beam

Move the combination switch back to its starting position.

Headlamp flashing

Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3.

Turn signal light

To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ② or ④. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.

To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ② or ④.

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

Press button ①.

The hazard warning lights will switch on automatically if:

• the airbag has been deployed.
- the vehicle is braked heavily from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill.

When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning light system using button ①.

Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED

Intelligent Light System function

The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide extended functions for improved illumination of the road.

The system comprises the following functions:

• Active headlamps (→ page 129)
• Cornering light ( page 129)
• Motorway mode (→ page 130)
• Enhanced fog light function ( page 130)

• Bad weather light ( page 130)
• City lighting (→ page 130)

The system is active only when it is dark.

Active headlamps function

• The headlamps follow the steering movements.
• Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey.

The functions are active when the low beam is switched on.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be

evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance.

Cornering light function

The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. The cornering light will be activated only when low beam is switched on.

The function will be active in the following cases:

- At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned

- At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and when the steering wheel is turned

Roundabout and junction function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or junction.

Motorway mode function

Motorway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility.

The function will be active if a motorway journey is detected by means of:

- the vehicle's speed

• the multifunction camera
- the navigation system

The function is not active in the following cases:

• at speeds below 80 km/h

Enhanced fog light function

The enhanced fog light function reduces self-dazzling and improves the illumination of the edge of the carriageway.

The function is automatically activated under the following conditions:

- At speeds below 70 km/h and when the rear fog light is switched on.

The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions:

• When speeds greater than 100 km/h are reached.
• When the rear fog light is switched off.

Function of the bad weather light

The bad weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. The driver and other road users are dazzled less as a result.

The city lighting function

City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light.

The function is active in the following cases:

• At low speeds
  • In illuminated parts of urban areas
  Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off

Requirements:

• The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

Settings Lights
▶ Intelligent Light System
▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist function

WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to:

• road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
• road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
- road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.

In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be

activated despite the presence of other road users.

▶ Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Detection may be restricted in the following cases:

• in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
- if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light:

• Low beam
• High beam

At speeds greater than 30 km/h:

- If no other road users are detected, the high beam will switch on automatically.

The high beam will switch off automatically in the following cases:

• At speeds below 25 km/h
• If other road users are detected
• If street lighting is sufficient

The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off

Switching on

Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.
Switch on high beam using the combination switch.

If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the indicator lamp will light up in the central display section of the instrument display.

Switching off

Switch off high beam using the combination switch.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function

WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to:

• road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
• road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
- road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.

In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.

▶ Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases:

• in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
- if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light:

• Low beam
• Partial high beam
• High beam
  • ULTRA RANGE Highbeam

ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the brightness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum.

Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not dazzle them but enables full high-beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. Highly reflective signs are also illuminated with reduced brightness.

At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is sufficient street lighting:

- Partial high beam and high beam will be switched off automatically.

At speeds greater than 30 km/h:

• If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automatically.
• If other road users are detected, partial high beam will switch on automatically.

at speeds below 40 km/h:

- The ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will switch off automatically.

At speeds above 50 km/h:

• If no other road users are detected, the road is straight and it is not raining heavily, the ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically.
• If other road users are detected, the ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will automatically switch off and the partial high beam will switch on.
• If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched off automatically.

The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off

Switching on

▶ Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.
Switch on high beam using the combination switch. When high beam is switched on automatically in the dark, the [≡] indicator lamp will light

up in the central display section of the instrument display.

Switching off

Switch off high beam using the combination switch.

Setting low beam for left-side or right-side traffic (vehicles with MULTIBEAM LED headlamps only)

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Lights

Dipped-beams

Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or Automatic.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time

Requirements:

• The light switch is in the AUTO position.

Multimedia system:

Settings Lights

Ext. light. del. sw. off

Set the switch-off delay time. When the vehicle's engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.

Switching the surround lighting on/off

Multimedia system:

Settings Lights

▶▶ Surround lighting

When Surround lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated.

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Interior lighting

Adjusting the interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

Front left reading lamp

2 Automatic interior lighting control

3 Front interior lighting

4 Rear interior lighting

5 Front right reading lamp

To switch on or off: press button ① - ⑤ accordingly.

Control panel in the grab handle

① Rear reading lamp

To switch on or off: press the ① button.

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system:

Comfort Ambient lighting

Setting the colour

Select Colour.

Set the desired colour.

Adjusting the brightness

Select Brightness.
Adjust the brightness.

Activating the brightness for zones

Select Brightness.
▶ Select Brightness zones.
▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

or

▶ Set the brightness for the desired zones.

Activating multi-coloured lighting

Select Colour.
Select Multi-colour.
Select a colour combination.

Activating multi-coloured animation

Select Colour.
Select Multi-colour animat.. The chosen colour combination will change at predefined intervals.

Activating welcome lighting

Select Colour.
Select Welcome.
When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambient lighting sequence will run.

Activating dependency on air conditioning settings

Select Colour.

Select Climate.

If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient lighting will change briefly.

Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Lights

Int. light. del. sw. off

Switch the switch-off delay time on or off. When this function is active, the interior lighting lights up for a short time after the vehicle is locked.

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system

Switching the windscreen wipers on/off

1 0 Windscreen wipers off
2 … Intermittent wiping, normal
3 .... Intermittent wiping, frequent

4 — Continuous wiping, slow
5 = Continuous wiping, fast

Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5.

Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow

Single wipe Wipes with washer fluid

i Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash ( page 311).

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately.
Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (→ page 136). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

Removing the wiper blades

Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-screen.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ① as far as it will go.
Slide catch ② in the direction of arrow ③ until it engages in the removal position.
Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ④.

Fitting the wiper blades

Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ①.
Slide catch ② in the direction of arrow ③ until it engages in the locking position.
Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.

Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.
Switch on the vehicle.
Press the button on the combination switch (→ page 136). The wiper arms will return to their original positions.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

Maintenance display

Remove protective film ① from the maintenance displays on the tips of the newly fitted wiper blades.

When the colour of the maintenance displays changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper blades.

The duration until the colour changes varies depending on the usage conditions.

Mirrors

Operating the outside mirrors

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of accident due to misjudgement of distance when using the outside mirror

The outside mirrors reflect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear.

Therefore, always look over your shoulder in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.

Folding the outside mirrors in/out

Briefly press button ①.

Resetting the outside mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the outside mirrors must be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

Briefly press button 1.

Adjusting the outside mirrors

Press button ③ or ④ to select the outside mirror to be adjusted.
Press button ② to adjust the position of the mirror glass.

Engaging the outside mirrors

▶ Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position.
Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button ①. You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function

WARNING Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks.

The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.

If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following:

• Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention.
• If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention.
• If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.
• Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte.
• If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror.

System limits

The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if:

• The vehicle is switched off.
- Reverse gear is engaged.
• The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking position function

The parking position makes parking easier.

The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when:

• the parking position is stored ( page 140).
• the front-passenger mirror is selected.
• reverse gear is engaged.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when:

• you shift the transmission to another transmission position.
• you are travelling at a speed greater than 15 km/h.
• you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side.

Storing the parking position of the front-passenger outside mirror using reverse gear

Storing

Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button ②.
Engage reverse gear.
Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 1.

Calling up

Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.
Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move to the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle

▶ Activate or deactivate Automatic fold-in.

Area permeable to radio waves on the wind-screen

Radio-controlled equipment such as toll systems can be mounted only on areas ① of the wind-screen that are permeable to radio waves.

Areas permeable to radio waves ① are best visible from outside the vehicle when the windscreen is illuminated with an external light source.

Note this position for vehicles with:

• Infra-red reflective windscreen

Infrared-reflective windscreen function

The infrared-reflective windscreen is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves.

Overview of climate control systems

Notes on climate control

An interior filter in combination with the prefilter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of the air-conditioning control panel

The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.

THERMATIC air conditioning control panel with/without stationary heater (example)

Sets the temperature, left
Sets the air distribution
3 Sets the airflow or switches off climate control
4 AUTO Sets climate control to automatic mode (→ page 144)
5 MAX Demists the windscreen

6 Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel (without stationary heater): MENU calls up the air conditioning menu Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel (with stationary heater, plug-in hybrid) or THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel (with/without stationary heater, plug-in hybrid): MENU calls up the air conditioning menu, switches residual heat on/off (→ page 145)
7 REAR Switches the rear window heater on/off
- Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel without stationary heater: SYNC switches synchronisation on/off (→ page 144)

Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel without stationary heater: A/c switches the A/C function on/off (→ page 143)

Vehicles with a stationary heater: switches the stationary heater on/off (→ page 147)

Plug-in hybrid: □□□□ activates/deactivates "Immediate pre-entry climate control"

9 Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (→ page 145)
10 Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel: A/C switches the A/C function on/off (→ page 143) Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel: sets the air distribution, right
Sets the temperature, right

Rear operating unit in vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel

① Sets the temperature
② Display:
3 Sets the temperature

Operating the climate control system

Switching climate control on/off

To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the button.
To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using the button.

If climate control is switched off, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly.

Switching the A/C function on/off using the air conditioning control panel

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.

Press the A/C button.

Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows may mist up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a fault.

Calling up the air conditioning menu

Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system

Select one of the temperature displays at the lower edge of the media display.

Calling up the air-conditioning menu using the button on the climate control panel

Press the MENU BEST button on the climate control panel.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Climate menu First row of seats

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.

Select A/C.

Setting climate control to automatic mode

In automatic mode, the set temperature is controlled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply.

Press button AUTO

To switch to manual mode: press the 📄 or button.

Climate style

Climate style function

The following climate styles are available in automatic mode:

• FOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting
• MEDIUM: medium airflow, standard setting
- DIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and draught-free setting

Setting the climate style

▶ Call up the air conditioning menu ( page 143).
Select First row of seats or Second row of seats.
▶ Call up the CLIMATE MODE menu.
Select a climate style.

Setting the air distribution

Multimedia system:

Climate menu

▶ Call up the air conditioning menu ( page 143).

Select a row of seats.

To set the air distribution: select 📄, 🖼 or 🏠.

Set the airflow.

Several air distributions can be selected at the same time, e.g. to air-condition both the windscreen and the footwell.

The climate control for the windscreen can only be selected for the first seat row.

Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronisation function via the air conditioning control panel

Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be

adopted automatically for the front passenger side.

Press the SYNC button.

The synchronisation function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate control zones are changed.

Switching the synchronisation function on/off via the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Climate menu First row of seats

Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution will be adopted automatically for all climate zones.

▶ Select SYNC and switch on or off.

Demisting the windows

Windows misted up on the inside

Press the AUTO button.

If the windows remain misted up: press the 📊 _UP MAX button.

Windows misted up on the outside

Switch on the windscreen wipers.

Press the AUTO button.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

Press the 📄 button. The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after a while.

If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Switching the residual heat on/off

Requirements:

• The vehicle is parked.

It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilating

the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes.

To switch on: press the MENU button.

Residual heat is switched off automatically.

Activating/deactivating ionisation

Multimedia system:

Climate menu Air quality

Ionisation improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionisation of the interior air is odourless.

select IONISATION and activate or deactivate the function.

Fragrance system

Setting the fragrance system

Requirements:

• Automatic climate control is activated.
• The glove compartment is closed.

Multimedia system:

Climate menu Air quality

The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove box.

Select AIR FRESHENER.
Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached.
Inserting or removing the flacon of the fragrance system

WARNING Risk of injury from liquid perfume

If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk.

If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water.
If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons

Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste.

Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

1 Cap

2 Flacon

To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go.
To remove: pull out the flacon.

If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior per fumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.

Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it.

Refillable flacon

Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon.
▶ Fill the flacon with a maximum of 15 ml.
Screw the cap back onto the flacon.

Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate information sheet with the flacon.

Stationary heater/ventilation

Stationary heater/stationary ventilation function

The following functions are performed:

• The air inside the vehicle is heated or ventilated to the set temperature.
• The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled down to temperatures below the outside temperature.

- If the outside temperature changes, ventilation mode automatically switches to heating mode or heating mode automatically switches to ventilation mode.

The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet are situated at the right-hand front wheel.

■ Switching the stationary heater/ventilation on/off via the operating unit

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.

▶ Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces without an air extraction system, e.g. in garages.
Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the vehicle or the auxiliary heating is running.

Open a door or a roof hatch on the windward side of the vehicle to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

WARNING Risk of fire due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust gases

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that:

• hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flammable materials.
- the exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater exhaust pipe unhindered.
- the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials.

NOTE Battery discharge caused by stationary heater or stationary ventilation operation

Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the battery.

After heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer period of time.

Requirements:

• The fuel tank is filled to at least the reserve level.
  Set the desired temperature using the ▼▲ button.
  Press the button. The red or blue indicator lamp on the button will light up or go out.

The colours of the indicator lamp have the following meanings:

• Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
• Red: the stationary heater is switched on.
• Yellow: the departure time is preselected.

The stationary heater/ventilation will switch off automatically after 50 minutes.

Setting the stationary heater/ventilation via the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Climate menu ▶ Auxiliary heating

Call up the air conditioning menu ( page 143).
Select Auxiliary heating.

Selecting the departure time

Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or TIME C: XX.

Setting the departure time

Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or TIME C: XX.
▶ Select the pen beside the time.
Set a time.

Setting the stationary heater/ventilation via remote control

Requirements:

- The fuel tank is filled to at least the reserve level.

Switching on immediately

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Press and hold the ON button.

Setting the departure time

Briefly press the ON button.
Press the ◀ or ▶ button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears on the display.

Press the ON and OFF buttons simultaneously.
The ⏻ symbol on the remote control display will flash.
Use the ◀ and ▶ buttons to set the desired departure time.
Press the ON and OFF buttons simultaneously.
The new departure time will be stored.

Up to three departure times can be stored.

To activate the departure time: select the desired departure time and press and hold the ON button.

The symbol, the departure time and, depending on the selected departure time, the letter A, B or C will appear on the display.

To deactivate the departure time: select the desired departure time and press and hold the OFF button.

OFF will appear on the display.

To check the status of the active stationary heater: briefly press the ON button.

Switching off immediately

▶ Press and hold the OFF button.
Overview of the remote control displays (stationary heater/ventilation)

① Stationary ventilation switched on
2 Stationary heater switched on
3 Selected departure time
4 Remaining time for the stationary heater/ventilation (in minutes)
⑤ Stationary heater/ventilation active
6 Departure time activated
7 Signal strength

Further possible displays:

• Time: the activated departure time.
- Zero minutes: the running time for the stationary heater is extended because the engine has not yet reached operating temperature when it is started.
- OFF: the stationary heater/ventilation is switched off.

■ Replacing the remote control battery (stationary heater)

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, severe internal burns can occur within two hours.

There is a risk of fatal injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children.

If the battery compartment cover and/or lid do not close securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children.
If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, seek immediate medical attention.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances.

Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

Requirements:

• One CR2450 lithium battery

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Push a pointed object into recess ①.
Slide battery cover ② backwards in the direction of the arrow and remove the empty battery.
Insert new battery ③ with the lettering facing upwards.
Slide battery cover ② in the opposite direction to the arrow onto the remote control until the battery cover engages.

Rectifying problems with the remote control for the stationary heater/ventilation

FAIL (↑) appears on the remote control display Possible cause:

• Signal transmission between the transmitter and receiver is malfunctioning.
Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary.

FAIL appears on the remote control display Possible cause:

• The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.
Charge the starter battery.
- The fuel tank content is below the reserve fuel level.
Refuel at the nearest filling station.

FAIL 🖼️ appears on the remote control display Possible cause:

• There is a malfunction in the stationary heater.

Have the stationary heater checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Air vents

Adjusting the front air vents

WARNING Risk of bums or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

To ensure the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, note the following:

• Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear.
• Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up (→ page 311).

To open or close: hold the centre of air vent ① and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go.
To set the airflow direction: hold the centre of air vent ① and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents

To open or close: hold the centre of air vent ① and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go.
To set the airflow direction: hold the centre of air vent ① and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Driving

Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes on the following topics in the Supplement, otherwise you may fail to recognise dangers.

The availability of certain functions depends on the equipment and model of the vehicle.

• Emotion Start
• AMG ceramic high-performance composite brake system
• DRIFT MODE
  • AMG RIDE CONTROL +
  • AMG steering-wheel buttons

Switching on the power supply or the vehicle

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
• change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

Requirements:

• The key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.

To switch on the power supply: press button ① once.

You can, for example, switch on the wind-screen wipers.

The power supply will be switched off again if the following conditions are met:

• You open the driver's door.

- You press button ① twice more.

To switch on the vehicle: press button twice.

Indicator and warning lamps will light up on the instrument cluster.

The vehicle will be switched off again if one of the following conditions is met:

- You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in position P or the electric parking brake is applied.

- You press button ① once.

Starting the vehicle

Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and results in poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater, running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

A WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system

Flammable materials may ignite.

Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.

Requirements:

• The key is in the vehicle and is recognised.

Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Depress the brake pedal and press button once.

If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-essential consumer equipment and press button ① once.

If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual display message appears on the instrument display: start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (→ page 154).

You can switch off the vehicle while driving. To do this, press and hold button ① for about three seconds or press button ② three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes concerning this under "Driving tips" (→ page 157).

Observe any information regarding display messages that may be displayed on the instrument display.

Starting the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual message appears on the instrument display, you can start the vehicle in emergency mode.

Make sure that marked space ② is empty.
Remove key ① from the key ring.
Place key ① in stowage compartment ②. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove key ① from marked space ②, the vehicle can still be driven. For further engine starts, however, key ① must be loca-

ted in marked space ② during the entire journey.
Have key ① checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Place key ① in marked space ② and leave it there.
Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button.
① You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button.
Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the instrument display.

If the vehicle does not start:

Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Services

Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting the journey

Ensure the following before starting the engine:

- The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone.

• It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
  • The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
  • The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Charging the starter battery before starting the journey

You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of the starter battery is low. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes.

Ensure the following before starting the engine:

• The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone.
• It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
  • The fuel tank is sufficiently full.

Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)

WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work.

Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.

Requirements:

• Park position is selected.
  • The anti-theft alarm system is not activated.
• The hazard warning light system is switched off.
  • The bonnet is closed.
  • The doors are closed and locked.
  • The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.

You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must start the engine with the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone.

You can switch off the vehicle at any time as follows:

• Via the Smartphone App
- By pressing the 🔒 or 🔒 button on the key

i Further information can be found in the smartphone app.

Securing the vehicle against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work:

▶ Switch on the hazard warning light system.

or

Unlock the doors.

or

Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.

Running-in notes

To preserve the engine during the first 1500 km:

• Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds.
  • No faster than 140 km/h.
• Drive the vehicle in drive mode C or E.
• Shift to the next higher gear at the very latest when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the rev counter.
• Do not shift down manually in order to brake.
• Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle.
• Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown).
• Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1500 km.

This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced.

Please also observe the following running-in notes:

• In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is only reached when this teaching-in process has concluded.
• Brake pads, brake disks and tyres that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect and grip after driving several hundred kilometres. Compensate the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Notes on optimised acceleration

If all necessary requirements and activation conditions are fulfilled, the best possible acceleration can be achieved from a standstill.

Do not use the optimised acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident.

Be sure to observe the safety notes and information on ESP ^® ( page 184).

Pulling away with optimised acceleration

WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning

When you use optimised acceleration, individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle.

If ESP ^® is deactivated, there is a risk of skidding and accident!

Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.

Requirements:

• the vehicle is run in (→ page 155).
• the vehicle and tyres are in good condition.
• you are on a high-grip roadway.
- the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature.

NOTE Increased wear due to optimised acceleration

When pulling away with optimised acceleration, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load.

This can lead to increased component wear.

Do not always pull away with optimised acceleration.

Engage the D drive position ( page 168).
Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position.
Select the sportiest available drive program ^+ or (→ page 165).
Deactivating ESP® (→ page 186).
Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with your left foot.
With your right foot, fully depress the accelerator pedal.

After no more than five seconds, take your left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceleration.
Switch on ESP® once the acceleration procedure is complete.

Ending optimised acceleration

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Reactivate ESP®.

① After you pull away with optimised acceleration, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that optimised acceleration values may be reached again only after a few minutes.

Notes on driving

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
▶ Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear

Incorrect footwear includes, for example:

• shoes with platform soles
• shoes with high heels
- slippers

There is a risk of an accident.

Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely.

WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched off while driving

If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available.

This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example.

You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example.

Do not switch off the vehicle while driving.

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and results in poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater, running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.

Do not shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect.

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in the snow.

Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running.

Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating

If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat.

This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail.

▶ Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. ▶ Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

! NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds

The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range.

Do not drive with the engine in the over-revving range.

NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by permanently depressing the brake pedal

Do not permanently depress the brake pedal while driving.

To use braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.

NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away

Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immediately.

Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.

NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel

The engine is not running smoothly and is mis-firing.

Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter.

Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent short-distance trips

The 12 V battery may not be sufficiently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery.
▶ Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head-room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.
▶ Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

Please bear in mind that all the speed values stated in this Owner's Manual are approximate and are subject to a certain tolerance.

Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle

When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occupied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change.

You should bear the following in mind:

• Do not exceed the permissible roof load and towing capacity. Also observe the information in the Technical Data.
• Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the

bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 112).

- Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.

Advice on driving on salt-strewn roads

The braking effect is limited on salt-strewn road surfaces.

Therefore, observe the following notes:

• Due to salt build-up on the brake disks and brake pads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in one-sided braking.
• Maintain a much greater safety distance to the vehicle travelling ahead.

Remove salt build-up as follows:

• Brake occasionally, paying attention to the traffic conditions
• Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey

Notes on aquaplaning

Aquaplaning can take place if a certain depth of water has built up on the road surface.

Observe the following notes during heavy precipitation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may occur:

R Reduce speed

R Avoid tyre ruts

R Avoid sudden steering movements

R Brake carefully

% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres (/ page 340).

Notes on driving through water on the road Water ingress can damage the engine, electrics and transmission.

Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage.

Observe the following if you have to drive through water:

R The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body.

R Drive at a maximum speed of 10 km/h; water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment.

R Vehicles travelling in front, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.

The braking effect of the brakes is reduced a fer fording. Brake carefully, paying attention to the tra c conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

ECO start/stop function

ECO start/stop function

% Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop function is not available in all drive programs. Observe the status display on the instrument display concerning this.

The engine will be switched o aomatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met:

R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position h or i.

R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: you depress the brake pedal when travelling at a low speed.

If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop:

R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle in front of you.

R The vehicle that stopped in front of you starts up again.

R You manoeuvre, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear.

% If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position j, the engine can be switched o in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.

The engine will restart automatically in the following cases:

R You engage transmission position h or k.

R You depress the accelerator pedal.

R The vehicle requires an automatic engine start.

R You release the brake pedal.

• Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system:
- You release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll.
- The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 20 km/h.

ECO start/stop function symbols on the instrument display:

• The (A) symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
• The symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle conditions for an engine stop have been met.
• Neither the Ⓐ symbol nor the Ⓞ symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, has been detected.
• The ^OFF symbol appears: the ECO start/stop function is deactivated or there is a malfunction.

If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning tone will sound and the engine will not be restarted. In addition, the following display message will appear on the instrument display:

Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting

If you do not switch off the vehicle, it will automatically be switched off after three minutes.

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function

Press button ①. If indicator lamp ② lights up, the ECO start/stop function is activated.

(i) Depending on the model and the vehicle equipment, the button may also be located at a different position in the centre console.

ECO display function

The ECO display summarises your driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style.

You can influence consumption by doing the following:

• driving with particular care.
  • following the gearshift recommendations.

The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will fill up when the following driving style is adopted:

• ① Steady speed

• ② Gentle deceleration and rolling
• ③ Moderate acceleration

The lettering in the segment will be grey, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adopted:

• ① Fluctuations in speed
• ② Heavy braking
• ③ Sporty acceleration

The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically:

• The three segments will fill up completely at the same time
• The edges around all three segments will light up

The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the centre of display ④. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption.

ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system)

ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate.

ECO Assist is displayed on the Assistance menu(→ page 251).

① Event ahead
2 Distance display for the event ahead
③ "Foot off the accelerator" prompt

Displayable route events ①

The segments of distance display ② show the distance to the event ahead as follows:

• A few segments light up: the event ahead is near.
• Many segments light up: the event ahead is further away.

When the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimal speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and gradient. The Foot off the accelerator ^③ message appears in the Instrument Display. The first segments in front of the

vehicle will turn green. The remaining segments will initially stay white. If you take your foot off the accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining segments on the display will successively turn green until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain will be set for maximum fuel economy. Recuperation will charge the battery. Recuperation will be adapted to the selected drive program.

The event will be shown for a short time after it has been passed. If there is no response to the Foot off the accelerator prompt, the segments will remain white.

If the event involves a vehicle in front, all segments will immediately turn green once there is a response to the Foot off the accelerator prompt.

For active ECO Assist in drive program [E], symbol ③ will appear on the instrument display and on the head-up display beside transmission position [D]. Symbol ③ will also appear when the assistant display is not selected.

If the system does not intervene during the event ahead, nothing will be displayed. The system will be passive.

ECO Assist is active only in drive programs E and C.

System limits

ECO Assist can function even more precisely if the route is adhered to when route guidance is active. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data.

ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The driver must be ready to brake at all times, irrespective of whether the system intervenes.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.

• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.

• If there is dirt on the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera or the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.

• If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured.
• If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date.
• If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-works or in adjacent lanes.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch

Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

(i) Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs.

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs.

The drive program selected appears on the instrument display.

Individual

- Individual settings

Sport+

• Particularly sporty driving
- Emphasises the vehicle's own oversteer and understeer characteristics for an even more active driving style
- Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road

Sport

• Continues to offer stability but with a sporty setup
- Enables a sporty driver to adopt a more active driving style
- Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road

Comfort

• Comfortable and economical driving
• Balance between traction and stability

• Recommended for all road conditions

Eco

• Particularly economical driving
• Balance between traction and stability
• Recommended for all road conditions

The ESP ^® settings in the drive programs E and C are designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these drive programs especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied.

Depending on the drive program, the following systems will change their characteristics:

• Drive
  Engine and transmission management
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

- ESP®

• Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL: suspension

• Electric power steering

Selecting the drive program

Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch ① forwards or backwards. The drive program selected will appear on the instrument display.

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system)

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting drive program I

▶ Select Individual configuration.
Select and set a category.
Switching the reset display on or off
▶ Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.

Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an additional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated.

The prompt only appears if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings.

Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the C drive program is set automatically. The

ECO start/stop function is activated automatically.

This function must be activated for each user profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and ECO start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile.

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system:

Info

Select Vehicle.

The vehicle data is displayed.

Displaying engine data

Multimedia system:
Info
Select Engine.
The engine data is displayed.

The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines).

Influencing variables that can influence this are, for example:

• Sea level
• Fuel quality
• Outside temperature
  • Operating temperature of the engine

The values displayed serve only as orientation. The values for engine output and engine torque shown on the media display may deviate from the actual values.

Calling up the fuel consumption indicator

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Info

Select Consumption.

The current and average fuel consumption is displayed.

Automatic transmission

DIRECT SELECT lever

Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position D or R, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

If you engage the transmission position D or R when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
• change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position will be shown on the instrument display.

P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R

Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance.
Engaging neutral N
Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
To shift into neutral [N] with the vehicle switched on, push the selector lever up or down for several seconds to the first point of resistance.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.

Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N even if the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened:

Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral N when the car is stationary.
Release the brake pedal.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.

If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral N.
Engaging park position P

NOTE Damage due to engaging park position P while the vehicle is rolling

If you shift the transmission into park position P while the vehicle is rolling, the transmission may be damaged.

If the vehicle is rolling, do not open a door.
Only engage the park position P when the vehicle is stationary.

Observe the notes on parking the vehicle ( page 177).
Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.
When the vehicle is stationary, press button P. When the transmission position display shows P, the park position is engaged. If the trans-

mission position display P does not appear, apply the parking brake and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

(i) Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.

Park position P will be engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met:

• You switch the stationary vehicle off in transmission position D or R.
• You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary in transmission position D or R.
• When the vehicle is rolling, you switch if off in transmission position D or R and bring it to a standstill.
• When the vehicle is rolling, you shift to transmission position [N], bring the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary.
• Engaging park position P automatically is required by the vehicle.

To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary and engage transmission position [D] or [R] again.

Engaging drive position D

Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

When the automatic transmission is in transmission position D, it will shift gears automatically. This depends, among other things, on the following factors:

• The selected drive program
• The position of the accelerator pedal
- The driving speed

Problems with the transmission

The transmission has a faulty gear shift

Possible cause:

• the transmission is losing oil.

Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The acceleration characteristics get worse, and the transmission no longer shifts.

Possible cause:

• the transmission is in emergency operation mode: it is possible to shift only to one gear and reverse gear.
  Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
  Shift the transmission to position [P].
  ▶ Switch off the vehicle.
  ▶ Wait at least ten seconds.
  Start the vehicle again.
  Shift the transmission to position [D] or [R]. If [D] is selected, the transmission will shift only to one gear; if [R] is selected, the transmission will shift to reverse gear.
  Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Manual gearshifting

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

When the automatic transmission is shifted to position [D], you can manually shift it with the steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission will shift to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift paddle being pulled.

You have two options for manually shifting the automatic transmission:

• Temporary setting
• Permanent setting

The gears will shift automatically when manual shifting is deactivated.

Temporary setting:

To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ① or ②. Manual shifting will be activated for a short time. The transmission position display will show M and the current gear.

How long manual shifting stays activated depends on various factors.

Manual shifting can be deactivated automatically in the following cases:

• When the drive program is changed
• When the vehicle is restarted
• When transmission position [D] is engaged again
• Driving style

To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ②.
To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ①.
To deactivate: pull and hold steering wheel gearshift paddle ②. The transmission position display will show D.

Permanent setting:

Change to drive program I* (→ page 165).
Select drive setting M (→ page 165).

Gearshift recommendation

The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

If gearshift recommendation ① appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear.

Using kickdown

▶ Maximum acceleration: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance.

To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission will shift up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached.

Glide mode function

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption.

Glide mode is characterised by the following:

• The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral.
• The transmission position display D is shown in green.
• Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: The combustion engine can be switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active.

Glide mode is activated if the following conditions are met:

• Drive program [E] is selected.
  • The speed is within a suitable range.

• The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends.

• There is no trailer hitched up to the trailer hitch, and no bicycle rack fitted.
• You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications).

Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program.

Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met.

Glide mode can also be prevented by the following parameters:

• Incline
• Downhill gradient
• Temperature
• Height
• Speed
  • Operating status of the engine
• Traffic situation

Function of 4MATIC

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.

In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary.

Refuelling

Refuelling the vehicle

WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
Before refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if fitted, the stationary heater and keep switched off during filling.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale fuel vapour.
▶ Keep children away from fuel.
Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.
Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour.

Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.

To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process.

WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture

Vehicles with a diesel engine:

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.

While the vehicle is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning.

▶ Never refuel using petrol.

▶ Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a petrol engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms

to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification.

Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Diesel
  • Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
• Petrol with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
• Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
  • Petrol with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a diesel engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent specification. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Petrol
• Marine diesel
• Heating oil
  • Pure bio-diesel or vegetable oil
  • Paraffin or kerosene

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

- Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

- Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

- Consult a qualified specialist workshop. - Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks

Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle

Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Requirements:

• The vehicle is unlocked.

Observe the notes on service fluids and fuel.

The recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap.

Fuel filler flap
② Bracket for fuel filler cap
3 Tyre pressure table
QR code for rescue card
5 Fuel type
Press on the rear part of fuel filler flap ①.
▶ Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it.

Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket ②.
Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

① Vehicles with diesel engine: The tank filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps.

Your vehicle is equipped with an incorrect fuel protection system to prevent filling up with the wrong fuel. This function may be deactivated in some countries due to local circumstances. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

① Vehicles with a diesel engine: Refuel with at least 5 litres of diesel if the fuel tank has been run dry completely.

① Vehicles with a diesel engine: Use a filler neck with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can. Otherwise, the filler neck cannot be pushed into the tank shaft.

Your vehicle is equipped with an incorrect fuel protection system to prevent filling up with the wrong fuel. This function may be deactivated in some countries due to local circumstances. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.

Close fuel filler flap ①.

AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)

Notes on topping up AdBlue®

AdBlue ^® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the exhaust gas aftertreatment to function properly, only use AdBlue ^® in accordance with ISO 22241.

AdBlue ^® is characterised by the following:

• non-toxic
  • colourless and odourless
• non-flammable

If you open the AdBlue ^® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may be released. Only fill the AdBlue ^® tank in well-ventilated areas.

Do not let AdBlue ^® come into contact with skin, eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue ^® away from children.

Do not ingest AdBlue ^® . If AdBlue ^® is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at once.

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 362).

AdBlue ^® is available here:

• AdBlue ^ can be topped up by fast service at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
• AdBlue ^ is available at many filling stations from AdBlue ^ filling pumps.
• Alternatively, AdBlue ^ is available at qualified specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz Service Centres, and at many filling stations in AdBlue ^ refill canisters or AdBlue ^ refill bottles.

i Ensure the connection between the refill container and vehicle filler neck does not drip.

Refilling AdBlue®

NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue® being in the fuel
AdBlue ^® must not be used to fill the fuel tank.
Only use AdBlue ^® to fill the AdBlue ^® tank.
Do not overfill the AdBlue ^® tank.
NOTE Contamination of the vehicle interior due to AdBlue® leakage
After topping up, carefully close the AdBlue® refill container.
Avoid carrying AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the vehicle.

Requirements:

• The vehicle is unlocked.

The following messages appear in order in the Instrument Display when the AdBlue ^® tank requires refilling:

• Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual. The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range. Refill AdBlue® immediately.
• Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual. The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been covered. Refill AdBlue® immediately.
• XX,X I Top up AdBlue Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km. The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle. Refill at least the indicated amount of AdBlue®.
• XX,X I Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss.. The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle. Refill at least the indicated amount of AdBlue®. Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds. Start the vehicle.

You can see the AdBlue ^® range and level in the Service menu in the Instrument Display.

The AdBlue ^® range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating conditions. The actual range can therefore deviate from the calculated range.

Opening the AdBlue® filler cap

Press on the rear part of fuel filler flap ①.
Turn AdBlue ^® filler cap ② anti-clockwise and remove it.

Refilling AdBlue®

Mercedes-Benz recommends refilling AdBlue ^® at a filling pump. If no AdBlue ^® filling pump is available, you can also top up AdBlue ^® using a canister.

Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® refill canister 4.
Screw the disposable hose ③ onto the opening of AdBlue® refill canister ④ until hand-tight.

Screw the disposable hose ③ onto the filler neck of the vehicle until hand-tight.
Lift up and tip AdBlue ^® refill canister ④. The filling process stops when the AdBlue ^® tank is completely full.

AdBlue ^® refill canister 4 can be removed when it has been only partially emptied.

Unscrew and close the disposable hose ③ and AdBlue® refill canister ④ in reverse order.
Replace AdBlue ^® filler cap ② and turn it clockwise until it audibly engages.
Close fuel filler flap ①.
▶ Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds.

If the vehicle could not be started as the AdBlue ^® tank was empty, it can take up to 60 seconds for the refill to be detected.

Start the vehicle.

Avoid storing AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the vehicle.

Parking

Parking the vehicle

WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehicle rolling away

If the vehicle is not securely parked sufficiently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient.

On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving.
apply the parking brake.
Switch the transmission to position P.

WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.

In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

! NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away

Always secure the vehicle against rolling away.

NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control: The vehicle can lower because of temperature differences or longer non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body.

When stopping the vehicle and when driving off, make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body.

Bring the vehicle to a standstill by depressing the brake pedal.
On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
Apply the electric parking brake.

Engage transmission position P in a stationary vehicle with the brake pedal depressed ( page 167).
Switch off the vehicle by pressing button ①.
Release the service brake slowly.
Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Electric parking brake

Function of the electric parking brake (applying automatically)

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular • Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.

• get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
- Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

- releasing the parking brake.

• change the gearbox setting.

- start the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Keep the key out of reach of children.

The electric parking brake is applied if the transmission is in position P and one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

• The vehicle is switched off.
- The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake ( page 180).

In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied:

• The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary.
  • Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill.
• In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:
  The vehicle is switched off.
• The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
• There is a system malfunction.
  The power supply is insufficient.
• The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, the red (P) indicator lamp lights up in the Instrument Display.

The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the vehicle is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

■ Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically)

The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled:

• The driver's door is closed.
• The vehicle has been started.
- The transmission is in position D or R and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position P to D or R when on level ground.
- If the transmission is in position , the boot lid must be closed.
- The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat.

If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:

• You shift from transmission position P. or
• You have previously driven at speeds greater than 3 km/h.

When the electric parking brake is released, the red (P) indicator lamp in the Instrument Display goes out.

■ Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually

Applying

Push handle

The red Ⓓ indicator lamp lights up in the Instrument Display.

The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red (P) indicator lamp is lit continuously.

Releasing

Switch on the vehicle.
Pull handle ①. The red (P) indicator lamp in the Instrument Display goes out.

Emergency braking

Press and hold handle ①.
As long as the vehicle is in motion, the Release parking brake message is displayed and the red indicator lamp flashes.
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red (P) indicator lamp lights up in the Instrument Display.

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle

If a collision is detected on the locked vehicle when towing protection is switched on and colli-

sion detection is switched on, you will receive a message in the multimedia system when the vehicle is switched on.

You will receive information about the following points:

• The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged.
  • The force of the impact.

The following situation can lead to inadvertent activation:

- The parked vehicle is moved, forexample, in a two-storey garage.

i Deactivate tow-away protection in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deactivate tow-away protection, collision detection will also be deactivated.

System limits

Detection may be restricted in the following situations:

- the vehicle is damaged without impact, forexample, if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key

• an impact occurs at low speed
• the electric parking brake is not applied
You are responsible for your vehicle. Convince yourself that your vehicle is free of damage and roadworthy.

Notes on parking up the vehicle

If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse.

The 12 V battery may also be impaired or damaged by heavy discharging.

i Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Standby mode (extension of the starter battery's period out of use)

Standby mode function

This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended periods of non-operation.

Standby mode is characterised by the following:

• The starter battery is preserved.
- The maximum non-operational time appears in the media display.
- The connection to online services is interrupted.
- The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not available.
- The interior protection and tow-away protection functions are not available.
- The function for detecting collisions on a parked vehicle is not available.

If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system:

• The vehicle is switched on.
• The vehicle has not been started.

Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle.

Charge the starter battery in the following situations:

• The vehicle's non-operational time must be extended.
• The Battery charge insufficient for standby mode message appears in the media display.

(i) Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.

Activating/deactivating standby mode (parking up the vehicle)

Requirements:

• The vehicle is switched off.

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

▶ Activate or deactivate Standby mode.
Select Yes.

Driving and driving safety systems

Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and manoeuvring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems.

Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Some driving systems can regulate or limit the speed to a previously set value. Draw attention to the stored speed when changing drivers.

Information on vehicle sensors and cameras

Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

① Multifunction camera
② Cameras in the outside mirrors
3 Front radar

4 Front camera
5 Corner radars
6 Ultrasonic sensors
7 Reversing camera

WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehicle sensors and cameras

If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident.

Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.
Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush

(→ page 315). The sensors and cameras must

not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range.

If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

The reversing camera can extend and retract automatically for the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image in the display.

Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems

• ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (→ page 184)

• BAS (Brake Assist System) (→ page 184)

• ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (→ page 184)
• ESP® Crosswind Assist (→ page 186)
• ESP® trailer stabilisation (→ page 186)
  • EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution) ( page 186)
  • STEER CONTROL ( page 187)
  • HOLD function ( page 187)
  • Hill Start Assist (→ page 188)
  • Adaptive Brake Lights (→ page 188)
  • ATTENTION ASSIST ( page 189)
  • Cruise control (→ page 190)
• Limiter (→ page 191)
  • Traffic Sign Assist (→ page 210)
• Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (→ page 209)
  • DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL ( page 218)
  • AIR BODY CONTROL ( page 218)
  • Trailer Manoeuvring Assist (→ page 237)

Driving Assistance Package

The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality.

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 194)
• Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) ( page 198)
- Route-based speed adaptation (country-dependent) (→ page 199)
• Active Brake Assist ( page 204)
• Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) ( page 201)
• Active Emergency Stop Assist (country-dependent) ( page 203)
• Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-dependent) ( page 201)
- Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( page 212)
• Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 215)

Parking Package

• Reversing camera ( page 221)
• 360° Camera (→ page 223)
- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 227)
• Active Parking Assist ( page 231)

Functions of ABS

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations:

• During braking, for instance, at maximum full-stop braking or if there is insufficient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking.
  • Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

System limits

• ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 km/h.

- ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow ABS warning lamp lights up continuously after the vehicle is started.

Function of BAS

WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased.

Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force.

If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated:

• BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure.
• BAS can shorten the braking distance.

• ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Function of ESP®

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated

If you deactivate ESP ^® , ESP ^® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.

▶ ESP ^® should only be deactivated in the following situations.

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP ^® ) can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations within physical limits:

• When pulling away on wet or slippery carriageways.
• When braking.

If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways:

• One or more wheels are braked.
- The engine output is adapted according to the situation.

When ESP® is deactivated, the OFF warning lamp lights up continuously:

• Driving stability will no longer be improved.
  • The drive wheels could spin.
  • ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.

When ESP ^ is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP ^ when braking.

When the warning lamp flashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit:

• Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.
• Do not deactivate ESP ^ .
• Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling away.

Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to improve traction:

• When using snow chains.
• In deep snow.
• On sand or gravel.

① Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.

If the ESP ^® warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP ^® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information:

• Indicator and warning lamps (→ page 432)
• Display messages (→ page 374)

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriageway.

ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways:

• The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin.
• More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Influence of drive programs on ESP®

The drive programs enable ESP ^ to adapt to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP ^ mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (→ page 165).

Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist

ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane:

• ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 80 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly.
• The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual brake application on one side.

Function of ESP ^® trailer stabilisation

WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions

In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high centre of gravity may tip over before ESP® detects this.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.

When driving with a trailer, ESP ^® can stabilise your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from side to side:

• ESP ^ trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of 65 km/h.
• Slight swerving is reduced by means of a targeted, individual brake application on one side.
• In the event of severe swerving, the operating energy output is also reduced and all wheels are braked.

ESP® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may not function if:

- The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Multimedia system:

Settings

Quick access

i ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function

is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

Select ESP.

Select On or Off.

ESP ^® is deactivated if the ☐ ESP ^® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster.

Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.

Function of EBD

Electronic Brakeforce Distribution (EBD) is characterised by the following:

• Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels.

- Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends.

Function of STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation.

This steering recommendation is given in the following situations:

• both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake
  • the vehicle starts to skid

System limits

STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• ESP ^ is deactivated.
• ESP® is malfunctioning.
  • The steering is malfunctioning.

If ESP ^® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.

HOLD function

HOLD function

The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.

The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.

System limits

The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary.

• The incline must not be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

A WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle

If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away:

• If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply.
• If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
  Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it.

Requirements:

• The vehicle is stationary.
- The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened.
- The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

• The electric parking brake is released.
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
- The transmission is in position D, R or N.

Activating the HOLD function

Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further until the HOLD display appears in the Instrument Display.
Release the brake pedal.

Deactivating the HOLD function

Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
or

Depress the brake pedal until the HOLD display disappears from the Instrument Display.

The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
• The transmission is shifted to position [P].
- The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.

In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position P and/or by the electric parking brake:

• The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened.
  • The vehicle is switched off.
  • There is a system malfunction.
  • The power supply is insufficient.

Function of Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions:

• The transmission is in position D or R.
• The electric parking brake is released.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away

After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle.

Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.

Function of Adaptive Brake Lights

Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation with the following actions:

• flashing the brake lamps
• activating the hazard warning lights (→ page 128)

If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps flash rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind you with an even more noticeable warning.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function of ATTENTION ASSIST

ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation.

You can choose between two settings:

• Standard: normal system sensitivity.
- Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly.

If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! warning appears in the Instrument Display. You can acknowledge the message and take

a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.

You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer:

• The length of the journey since the last break.
• The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST:
  the fuller the circle, the higher the attention level determined

as your attention wanes, the circle in the centre of the display becomes smaller

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears.

If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area. This function can be activated and deactivated in the multimedia system.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display. After the vehicle is started, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically activated. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.

System limits

ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range.

Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and warnings may be delayed or not occur:

- If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes.

• If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes).
  • If there is a strong side wind.
• If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
• If Active Steering Assist is activated and active ( page 201).
  • If the time has been set incorrectly.
• If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving situations.

The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations:

• If you switch off the vehicle.
- If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
Multimedia system:
Settings Assistance
▶ Attention Assist

Setting options

▶ Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

Suggesting a rest area

Select Suggest rest area.
Activate or deactivate the function. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity.
Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area.

Cruise control and limiter

Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver.

If you accelerate to overtake, forexample, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your

foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed.

You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 182).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: cruise control is available up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.

Displays in the Instrument Display

• (grey): cruise control is selected but not yet activated.
  • (green): cruise control is active.

A stored speed appears along with the ☑ display.

The segments extending from the current stored speed to the end of the scale, or to the set winter tyre limit, light up in the speedometer.

System limits

Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.

Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

Do not use cruise control in the following situations:

• in traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads
• on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.
• when visibility is poor

Function of the limiter

The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically.

You can limit the speed as follows:

• Variable: for a short-term speed restriction, e.g. in built-up areas
  • Permanent: for a longer-term speed restriction, e.g. in winter tyre mode

You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been started.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 182).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the limiter is available up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.

Displays in the Instrument Display

- LIM (grey): variable limiter is selected but not yet activated.

• LIM (flashes grey): variable limiter is temporarily passive.
  • LIM (green): variable limiter is activated.

A stored speed appears along with the LIM display. The segments in the speedometer light up, up to the currently stored speed.

If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter switches to passive mode. The Limiter passive message appears in the Instrument Display and the LIM display flashes.

The variable limiter is reactivated in the following situations:

• If the vehicle speed drops below the stored speed.
  • If the stored speed is called up.
  • If you store a new speed.

Operating cruise control or the variable limiter

WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed

If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates.

Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

Requirements:

Cruise control

• Cruise control is selected.
- ESP ^ must be activated, but not intervening.
• The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h.
• The transmission is in position D.

Variable limiter

• The variable limiter is selected.

Steering wheel control panel for cruise control and variable limiter

RESI® Adopts the stored/detected speed CANCEL Deactivates cruise control/the variable limiter

Selects cruise control

LIM Selects the variable limiter

Control panel to increase/decrease speed

Operating cruise control and the variable limiter

Press the corresponding button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel.

Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter

To select cruise control: press 📞.

To select the variable limiter: press LIM.

① Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by a different button ( page 196).

Activating cruise control or the variable limiter

Press SET/+ or SET/- on control panel ①. The current vehicle speed is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter).

or

Press RESIP. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.

When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted.

Increasing/decreasing the stored speed

To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel ①.
• The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel ①. The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.

or

Briefly press SET/+ or SET/- on control panel The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten (e.g. to 50 km/h or 60 km/h).

or

Press and hold SET/+ or SET/- on control panel ①.
The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten and afterwards by increments of 10 km/h.

or

Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

Press SET/+ on control panel ①.

When the variable limiter is switched to passive mode, you cannot increase or decrease its stored speed in increments of 1 km/h.

Adopting a detected speed

If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is displayed in the instrument cluster:

Press RES/8. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed.

Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter

Press CANCEL.

If you brake, deactivate ESP ^ or if ESP ^ intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated.

Information on the permanent limiter If the vehicle should never exceed a specific speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter.

You do this by limiting the speed between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia system ( page 194).

Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears in the Instrument Display. When you confirm the message, display messages no longer appear until you switch off the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle has been restarted or if the set speed is changed.

The permanent limiter does not switch to passive mode even during kickdown and the driven speed remains below the set speed.

Setting the limit speed for winter tyres Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle → Winter tyres limit

Select a speed or deactivate the function.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist maintains the set speed when driving freely. If vehicles are detected ahead, the set distance is maintained, if necessary until the vehicle comes to a standstill. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range:

• Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 200 km/h
• Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 210 km/h

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

• Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfortable or dynamic)
• Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane

- Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: - Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) - Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways (country-dependent)

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Parking Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate carriageways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must

now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 182).

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the Instrument Display

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Assistant display

Route-based speed adaptation: type of route event ( page 199)
② Vehicle in front
3 Distance indicator
4 Set specified distance

Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

• [unknown] (white): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set
• [icon] (white vehicle, green speedometer): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and no vehicle detected
• (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected
• (∞): Route-based speed adaptation active (→ page 199).

The stored speed is shown along with the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is greyed out.

On motorways or high-speed major roads, the green [icon] vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away.
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive

mode. The suspended message will appear on the instrument display.

Display on the speedometer

The stored speed is highlighted on the speedometer. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment for the route event ahead is less than the stored speed, the segments in the speedometer light up. The Instrument Display shows the deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as alterations to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example:

• In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.
• The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
  • If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
• In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.

- If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.

Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example:

• If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
• If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed.
• If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.

Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to brake at all times.
Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.

Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction:

• when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes
  • to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
  • to complex traffic conditions
  • to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations.

Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly.

Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the variable limiter

Requirements

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

• The electric parking brake is released.
- ESP® is activated and is not intervening.
• The transmission is in position D.
- All the doors are closed.
- Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed.

Variable limiter:

• The variable limiter is selected.

RES/PR CANCEL Adopts the stored/detected speed Deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC/ the variable limiter Increases/decreases the speed Increases/decreases the specified distance Switches between the variable limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter: press the respective button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel.

Switches between the variable limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Press LM.

Activating the variable limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

To activate without a stored speed: press SET/+, SET/- or RES/#. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle.

or

To activate with a stored speed: press RES/8. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). If the stored speed has been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.

When you switch off the vehicle, the stored speed is deleted. When you activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted.

Increasing or reducing the speed

To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel ①. • The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel ①. The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.

or

Briefly press SET/+ on the upper section or SET/- on the lower section of control panel The stored speed is increased or reduced by 10 km/h.

or

Press and hold SET/+ on the upper section or SET/- on the lower section of control panel ①. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 10 km/h.

or

▶ Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

Press SET/+ on the upper section of control panel ①.

Adopting the limit speed shown in the instrument cluster

Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter: press SET/+, SET/- or RES/ I .

Accept the displayed speed limit: press RES/ I . The limit speed displayed in the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.

A speed limit shown in the driver display is only adopted while driving, not when stationary.

Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal. Press RES ^® .

or

Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

Reducing or increasing the specified distance from the vehicle in front

Press 📄. The 📄 display appears. The specified distance is reduced by one level. If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level.

Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter

WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat

If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.

Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.

Press CANCEL.

If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated.

Function of Active Speed Limit Assist

If a change in the speed limit of 20 km/h or more is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed limit is automatically adopted as the stored speed ( page 212).

The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign.

If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a motorway), the recommended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended speed is 130 km/h.

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 182).

System limits

The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs ( page 210).

Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system.

Adjust the speed in these situations.

WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed

The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as:

• at speed limits below 20 km/h
• in wet conditions or in fog
- when towing a trailer

▶ Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.
Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.

Function of route-based speed adaptation

When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an economical, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account.

You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system ( page 200).

The following route events are taken into account:

• Bends
  • T-junctions, roundabouts and toll stations

• Turns and exits

• Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic Information)
  When the toll station is reached, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed.

Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indicator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected:

• Turning at junctions
• Driving on slowing-down lanes
• Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes

The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.

When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated.

Speed adaptation is cancelled in the following cases:

• If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event.
• If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process.

System limits

Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed.

The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the following situations:

• the road's course not clearly visible
• Road narrowing
  • varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, forexample at toll stations
• wet road surfaces, snow or ice
• when towing a trailer

In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation

Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations:

• If the driver does not follow the calculated route
  • If map data is not up-to-date or available
  • In the event of roadworks
  • In bad weather or road conditions
  • If the accelerator pedal is depressed
• In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations
  Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.

Setting route-based speed adaptation

Requirements:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
• ECO Assist is active.

Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance

5 Route-based speed adapt.

Activate or deactivate the function. When he function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.

% Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 199).

Function of Active Stop-and-Go Assist

Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you when in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds and with moderate steering manoeuvres. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in.

Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving sys-

tems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 182).

Active Tra c Jam Assist activates automatically as soon as all of the requirements are met: The status display appears in the instrument cluster when the function is active.

Requirements:

R You are in a trac jam on a motorway or high-speed major road.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and active (/ page 196).
R Active Brake Assist is available (/ page 204).
R Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 203).
R Active Tra c Jam Assist is activated (/ page 201).
R You are travelling no faster than 60 km/h.

System limits

The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Tra c Jam Assist.

Activating/deactivating Active Tra c Jam Assist

Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access

Select →.

Active Steering Assist

Function of Active Steering Assist

Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference.

% Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding tra c as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving outside the centre of the lane, forexample, to form a rescue lane.

If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches

to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.

Status display of the active steering assistant

• (grey): activated and passive
• (green): activated and active
• (red): system limits detected
- (white, red hands): "hands on the steering wheel" prompt

During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. When the passive state is reached, the symbol is displayed in grey.
(i) Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.

Steering and touch detection

The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display ① appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.

If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop ( page 203).

The warning does not occur or stops as soon as the system detects that the driver is touching or steering the steering wheel.

Touch detection may be limited or inoperative in the following situations:

• The driver is wearing gloves.
- There is a steering wheel cover on the steering wheel.

If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 182).

System limits

Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances:

• There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light conditions or strong shadows on the carriageway.
• There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.

• Insufficient road illumination.
- The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker.
- No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, forexample, in a construction area or junctions.
- The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
- If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
• The road is narrow and winding.
- There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers.

The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions:

• On tight bends and when turning.
- When crossing junctions.
• At roundabouts or toll stations.
- When towing a trailer.

• When the tyre pressure is too low.
  WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops functioning
  If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane.
  Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully.
  Always steer the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions.

WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes

The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions.

▶ Steer according to traffic conditions.

Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist

Requirements:

- ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.

Multimedia system:

Settings Quick access

Select Act. Steer. Asst.

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display ① appears in the Instrument Display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning

tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.

If the driver still does not respond to the warning, the Beginning emergency stop message appears in the Instrument Display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill.

Depending on the country, at speeds below 60 km/h the hazard warning lights switch on automatically.

When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out:

• The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended.
  • The vehicle is unlocked.
• If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:

- Steering

• Braking or accelerating
  • Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Brake Assist

Function of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions:

• Distance warning function
• Autonomous braking function
- Situation-dependent braking assistance
• Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds and the distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.

If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations.

In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking application.

If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or apply the brake during autonomous braking, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 182).

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display ① appears in the Instrument Display and then automatically goes out after a short time.

If the autonomous braking function or the situation-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated.

WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.

In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:

• Give a warning or brake without reason
• Not give a warning or not brake

Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the functions are restricted, e.g. due to activation of another driving system, the OFF display message appears in the driver's display.

If the system is unavailable due to dirty or damaged sensors or due to a fault, or if the functions are restricted, the ⚡! warning lamp appears in the driver's display.

Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.

The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges:

The distance warning function can issue a warning in the following situations:

• From approximately 30 km/h, if over several seconds the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient for the driven speed, the △ distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
• From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.

Brake immediately or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this.

Distance warning function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)

The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching crossing pedestrians

Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead

• at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles

• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead

• at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Autonomous braking function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)

If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:

• at speeds up to approximately 200 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles or moving pedestrians

Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)

The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead

• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles and cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians

Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles, and stationary and crossing cyclists

Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake Assist

You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by:

• sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown
• releasing the brake pedal

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake application when one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

• You manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle.
  • There is no longer a risk of collision.
• An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle.

Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

Evasive Steering Assist has the following characteristics:

• The ability to detect stationary or moving pedestrians.

• Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving manoeuvre.

• Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving manoeuvre.

• Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle.
• Reaction from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h.

You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.

Cornering function (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

If the system detects a risk of a collision with an oncoming vehicle when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 15 km/h before you have left the lane in which you are driving.

WARNING Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist

Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognise objects or complex traffic situations clearly.

Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.
End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.
▶ Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.

System limits

Full system performance is not yet available for a short time after switching on the vehicle or after driving off. As long as the functions are restricted, the warning lamp can also be shown in the driver's display. Depending on the environmental conditions, it may take a few minutes before full system performance is available.

The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations:

• In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.
• If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
• If the sensors are impaired due to interference from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in multi-storey car parks.
• If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed.
• In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified.
• If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range.
• If pedestrians are hidden by other objects.
• If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background.
• If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects.

• If the driver's seat belt is not fastened.

• On bends with a tight radius.
  The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in process.

Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance

▶ Active Brake Assist

Select the desired setting.

Deactivating Active Brake Assist

It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated.

Select Off.

The distance warning function, the autonomous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated.

The system is switched on again the next time the vehicle is started.

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the Instrument Display.

Speed Limit Assist

Function of Speed Limit Assist

Speed Limit Assist uses OpenStreetMap data, which is made available under the conditions of the Open Database License (OBbL). For more information, see: https://www.osmfoundation.org/wiki/licence.

Speed Limit Assist detects speed limits with a multifunction camera and displays them in the instrument cluster and optionally in the head-up display. The camera also detects speed limits with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). The system detects stop signs, thereby preventing the engine from being switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 182).

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded

The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. Depending on the country, you can set in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permitted speed may be exceeded before a warning is given. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.

Display in the Instrument Display

The illustrations show the Instrument Display in the widescreen cockpit.

① Permissible speed
② Permissible speed when there is a restriction
③ Additional sign with restriction

If Speed Limit Assist cannot determine the current maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:

This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Speed Limit Assist is not suppor-

ted. Speed Limit Assist is not available in all countries.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
• If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured.
• If you turn sharply when passing traffic signs outside the camera's field of vision.

Setting Speed Limit Assist

Multimedia system:

Adjusting the type of warning

▶ Select Visual & audible, Visual or None.

Adjusting the warning threshold

This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.

▶ Select Warning threshold.
Set the desired speed.
If one of the following systems is activated, the speed detected can be manually adopted as the speed limit:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

- Cruise control

- Variable limiter

Further information ( page 196).

Traffic Sign Assist

Function of Traffic Sign Assist

Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera ( page 182). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the Instrument Display.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 182).

Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs.

If the system detects that you are driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction of travel, it triggers a warning.

The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restriction applies or if the system cannot clearly determine whether the restriction applies.

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded

The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. Depending on the country, you can set in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permitted speed may be exceeded before a warning is given. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.

Display in the Instrument Display

Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit

① Maximum permissible speed
② Maximum permissible speed when there is a restriction
3 Additional sign with restriction
Vehicles with a standard Instrument Display: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional traffic signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the head-up display.

If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:

This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not supported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries.

Also observe the information on display messages in Traffic Sign Assist ( page 374).

Warning when approaching pedestrian crossings (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

The system can warn you if you approach a pedestrian crossing with your vehicle. The Watch for pedestrians message appears in the instrument cluster.

The warning occurs only if appropriate traffic signs or lane markings are detected and pedestrians are present in the danger zone.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
• If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured.
• If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date.
• If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-works or in adjacent lanes.
• If you turn sharply when passing traffic signs outside the camera's field of vision.

Setting Traffic Sign Assist

Requirements:

- Only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO Assist must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits.

Multimedia system:

Activating or deactivating automatic adoption of speed limits (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

Select Adopt limit.

Switch the function on or off. The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- Cruise control

- Variable limiter

Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: ( page 196).

Displaying detected traffic signs in the media display

▶ Select Display in head unit.
▶ Switch the function on or off.
Setting the type of warning

▶ Select Visual & audible, Visual or Off.

Setting the warning threshold

This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.

Select Warning threshold.

Set the desired speed.

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

■ Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor

the area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle.

If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approximately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red.

Permanent status display in the instrument cluster:

• (grey): system is activated but inoperative
  • (green): system is activated and operational

If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp.

If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist

Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the following:

• if you overtake a vehicle too closely so that it is in the blind spot area
• if vehicles travelling at a much faster speed approach and then overtake

Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such situations.

▶ Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 182).

Exit warning

The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary.

WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance.

If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash.

This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warning is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes after switching the vehicle off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times.

The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants.

System limits

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular:

• if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
• in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
• if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes
  • if the road has very wide or narrow lanes
• if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane

Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time.

Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged.

Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning are not operational when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

The exit warning may be limited in the following situations:

• when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces
  • when people approach the vehicle
• in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects

Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist)

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision.

The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 30 km/h and 200 km/h.

WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist

A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.

Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application.
Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, display

① indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the Instrument Display.

In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

System limits

Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognise the dangers ( page 212).

Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations:

• Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle.
• A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
- You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds.
- You brake or accelerate significantly.

• A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP ^ or Active Brake Assist.
• ESP® is deactivated.
• A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected.
• You are driving with a trailer and the electrical connection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ Assistance

Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist. or
▶ Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera ( page 182). It serves to protect you

against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correcting brake application back into your lane.

Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.

The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is displayed in the on-board computer:

• (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active and operating.
• (grey): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active but not operating.
• Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated or there is a malfunction.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display ① appears in the Instrument Display.

The system does not apply the brake if you activate the turn signal indicator.

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator.

You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances:

• Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking.
• A front wheel drives over this lane marking.

Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) Depending on the setting, a course-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations ( page 218).

The availability of this setting is dependent on the country. If the function is activated in countries in which this setting is not available, a lane-correcting brake application is initiated in the following situations: Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continuous lane marking.

Standard setting

• Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continuous lane marking.
• A lane marking and the edge of a firm road surface were detected. The front wheel drives over a lane marking on the edge of the firm road surface.
• A lane marking and an oncoming vehicle were detected. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.

Sensitive setting

• All situations described under the Standard setting.
• A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel.

A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.

Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Depending on the setting, a course-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations ( page 218).

The availability of this setting is dependent on the country. If the function is activated in countries in which this setting is not available, a lane-correcting brake application is initiated in all situations described under Sensitive.

Standard setting

- A lane marking and an approaching vehicle, an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving parallel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent

lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.

Sensitive setting

• The situations described under the Standard setting.
• A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel.

A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.

System limits

No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations:

• You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
• If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP ^ , Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.
• You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration.

• When ESP ^ is deactivated.

• When driving with a trailer, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established.

• If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected and displayed.

If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly detected, it is possible that no lane-correcting brake application takes place ( page 218). The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections.
• If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.

• If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks.

• If the lane markings are worn, dark or covered.

• If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
• If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge.
  • If the carriageway is very narrow and winding.
• Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place.

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist

Multimedia system:

Settings Quick access
▶ Active Lane Keeping Assist
▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ Assistance

▶ Active Lane Keeping Assist

Setting the sensitivity

i The availability of this function is country-dependent.

▶ Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

Activating or deactivating the haptic warning

Select Warning. Activate or deactivate the function.

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL function

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL continuously adjusts the characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions.

The damping is set individually for each wheel and is affected by the following factors:

• the road surface conditions
- vehicle load
• the drive program selected

- the driving style

The drive program can be adjusted using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

AIR BODY CONTROL

AIR BODY CONTROL function

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level.

AIR BODY CONTROL includes the following components and functions:

• Air suspension with variable spring rate
• Automatic level control system
- Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption
- Manually selectable high-level setting for greater ground clearance
• ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment)
• DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button

Suspension setting and vehicle level per drive program

Drive program C :

• The suspension setting is comfortable.
• The vehicle is set to the normal level.
- When driving at speeds of approximately 125 km/h or above, the vehicle is lowered.
- When driving at speeds below approximately 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again.

Drive program E:

• The suspension setting is comfortable.
• The vehicle is set to low level -1.
- The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds.

Drive program S :

• The suspension setting is firmer.
• The vehicle is set to low level -1.
- The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds.

Drive program S ^+ :

• The suspension setting is even firmer.
• The vehicle is set to low level -1.
- The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds.

Individual suspension settings can be called up in drive program 1* (→ page 165).

Setting the vehicle level

WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

▶ Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.

WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control system: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards.

You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped.

The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering

Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered.

Make sure that there are no obstacles such as kerbs underneath or in the

immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

Requirements:

• The vehicle has been started.
- The vehicle must not be moving faster than 60 km/h.

Raising the vehicle

Press button

Indicator lamp ② lights up.

The vehicle is set to the high level.

Your selection is saved.

The vehicle is automatically lowered again in the following situations:

- When driving faster than 80 km/h.

• When driving between 60 km/h and 80 km/h for approximately three minutes.
  • After changing a drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active drive program.

Lowering the vehicle

Press button

Indicator lamp ② goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program.

Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack

If the electrical connection to the transport equipment, such as a trailer or a bicycle rack, is established correctly:

• Up to approximately 30 km/h: the high level can be selected regardless of the drive program.
• From approx. 30 km/h; the vehicle is adjusted to normal level regardless of drive program.

Reversing camera

Function of the reversing camera

The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances displayed only apply to road level.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views:

• Normal view
• Wide-angle view
• Trailer view

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rear view mirror.

Vehicles without Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view

1 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
2 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear area
3 Lane marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
4 Bumper
5 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area

Wide-angle view

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)

Locating aid

② Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view

Yellow warning display: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.7 m and 1.0 m
Orange warning display: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.4 m and 0.7 m

3 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear area
4 Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
5 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
6 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area

The colour of warning display ①/② changes dynamically and is based on the distance to the detected obstacle:

• Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance less than 1.0 m detected.
• Yellow: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.7 m and 1.0 m
• Orange: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.4 m and 0.7 m
• Red: obstacles at a very short distance of approximately 0.4 m or less

① Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings are displayed in green.

Wide-angle view

① Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)

① Yellow guide line, locating aid
2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

System malfunction

If the reversing camera is not operational, the System inoperative message appears in the media display.

System limits

The reversing camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

• The boot lid is open.

• The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
  • The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
• Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras ( page 182).

Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
i Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

360° Camera

Function of the 360° Camera

The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras which cover the immediate sur-

roundings of the vehicle. The system assists you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, forexample.

The views of the 360° Camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 16 km/h and when reversing.

The 360° Camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

The system evaluates images from the following cameras:

• Reversing camera
• Front camera
• Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

Views of the 360° Camera

① Wide-angle view, front
2 Top view with image from the front camera
③ Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors
④ Wide-angle view, rear
5 Top view with image from the reversing camera
6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)

Function of the guide lines

Guide lines are also displayed in the camera images of the top views. These are based on the

current steering angle and show the distance to objects and other vehicles.

① Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear area
② Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
a Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
① When Active Parking Assist is active, paths ② are displayed in green.

The guide lines show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch.

In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is also shown ( page 227).

The colour of warning display changes dynamically and is based on the distance to the detected obstacle:

• Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance less than 1.0 m
• Yellow: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.7 m and 1.0 m
  • Orange: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.4 m and 0.7 m
• Red: obstacles at a very short distance of approximately 0.4 m or less

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the warning display is shown here in blue.

Wide-angle view, front

1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Top view with image from the front camera

① Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 227, 237)
② Your vehicle from above
3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle

Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors

The front and rear sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.

Top view trailer view – no trailer connected If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the following display appears:

Locating aid
② Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

Top view trailer view – trailer connected When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer, the display changes to the side camera view.

This view supports manoeuvring procedures with a trailer.

System limits

If the system is not ready for operation, the System inoperative message appears in the media display.

The 360° Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

• You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h.
  • The doors are open.
• An outside mirror is not completely folded out.
  • The boot lid is open.
• The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.

• The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
- The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up.
- If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° Camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images.

The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. licence plate bracket, bicycle rack).

The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
i Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera ( page 315).

Calling up the view of the 360° Camera using reverse gear

Requirements:

• The Auto reversing camera function is activated in the multimedia system (→ page 227).
  Engage reverse gear.
  Select the desired view in the multimedia system ( page 223).
  If, after shifting to reverse gear, the image of the reversing camera is not shown: switch off the vehicle, press and hold the [P] button, switch on the vehicle and engage reverse gear again.

■ Switching reversing camera automatic mode on/off

The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings.

The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your surroundings and be ready to brake at all times.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Assistance ▶ Camera & parking

▶ Switch Auto reversing camera on or off.

Opening the camera cover of the reversing camera

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Assistance → Camera & parking
Select Open camera cover.
The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after an ignition cycle.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the distance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exitting parking spaces.

The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. During the parking procedure or manoeuvring, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must first detect the object while you are driving past it.

In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has travelled one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be shown.

Displays in the media display

Vehicles with 360° Camera

Vehicles without 360° Camera

As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue.

① Operational, front and rear
② Operational, all around
③ Obstacles detected at the front left and on the right-hand side

The colour of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle:

• Blue: > 1 m (no obstacles detected)
• Yellow: approximately 1 m - 0.7 m

• Orange: approximately 0.7 m - 0.4 m
- Red: <0.4 m

Vehicles with 360° Camera: the boundary line shifts dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detected.

Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system(→ page 231).

Standard setting:

• Front and sides: < 0.4 m
• Rear: < 1 m

Warn early all-round:

• Front: < 1 m
• Sides: < 0.7 m
• Rear: < 1 m

A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.2 m, regardless of the selected setting.

Vehicles with 360° Camera

Vehicles without 360° Camera

If an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected and the Camera & parking menu is not open in the media display, pop-up window 📄 appears:

• vehicles without Active Parking Assist: at speeds below 12 km/h
• vehicles with Active Parking Assist: at speeds below 18 km/h

Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 1.0 m in front ② and 0.7 m on the side ③ can also be displayed in the head-up display.

System limits

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles:

• Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects.
• Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries.
• Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehicle from the side.
• Objects placed next to the vehicle

Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the following situations, for example:

• You park the vehicle and switch it off.

- You open the doors.

After an engine start, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a warning can be issued.

Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; the system otherwise cannot function properly ( page 182).

Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer.

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

① Vehicles with 360° Camera
② Vehicles without 360° Camera

If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds then goes out, and the _y^0T symbol appears in the instrument cluster, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle

again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.
If the P_ij^CH symbol appears in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes:

• The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (→ page 315).
• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range.

When parking or manoeuvring the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars.

The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged.

Vehicles without AIR BODY CONTROL: press the P ^27 button in the centre console.
① Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: you can activate or deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the multimedia system (→ page 230).

If the indicator lamp in the P_ij^OFF button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit or the P_ij^OFF symbol appears in the Instrument Display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started.

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC using the multimedia system

NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range.

When parking or manoeuvring the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged.

Requirements:

• The camera menu is open.
• Or: Active Parking Assist is active.
• Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears.

Tap 📁 on the media display.

If the indicator lamp in the P_ij^off button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit or the P_ij^off symbol appears in the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started.

Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.

Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ Assistance

▶ Camera & parking

Adjusting the volume of the warning tones

▶ Select Warning tone volume.

Set a value.

Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones

▶ Select Warning tone pitch.

Set a value.

Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obstacle.

▶ Select Warn early all-round.

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Activating/deactivating audio fadeout

You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone.

▶ Select Audio fadeout during warning tones.

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Active Parking Assist

Function of Active Parking Assist

Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the reversing camera and 360° Camera. When you are driving forwards up to approximately 35 km/h, the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

Active Parking Assist offers the following functions:

Vehicles with reversing camera

• Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road
  Vehicles with 360° Camera
• Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road

• Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or reverse)

• Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such due to markings (forexample at the roadside)

• Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist

As soon as all requirements are met for searching for parking spaces, the P display appears in the Instrument Display.

When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the ▶ display appears in the Instrument Display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display.

Vehicles with reversing camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. The vehicle is parked in reverse.

Vehicles with 360° Camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired.

When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calculated path of your vehicle.

The parking procedure is assisted by accelerating, braking, steering and gear changes.

Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

Active Parking Assist will be cancelled in the following situations:

• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
• You begin steering.
• You engage transmission position [P].
• ESP ^ intervenes.
• You open the driver's door.
• After activating Active Parking Assist, you press the 📄 button again (→ page 233).

System limits

If the exterior lighting is faulty, the active parking assistant may be out of function, depending on the defect.

Also observe the system limits of the following systems:

• Reversing camera ( page 221)
• 360° Camera ( page 223)

Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of goods vehicles, or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly.

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
- The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

There is a danger of collision!

In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.

Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations:

- In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.

• When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.
• On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more than approximately 15%.
• When snow chains are fitted.
• When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached.
• Directly after a tyre change or when spare tyres are fitted.
  • If the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
• If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. after bottoming out on a kerb.

Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as:

• Parking spaces where parking is prohibited.
• Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.

Parking with Active Parking Assist

Press button 1.

Parking spaces detected by the system are shown in the media display. When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path ② into currently selected parking space ③ also appears.

If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle.
If necessary, select another parking space.
▶ Vehicles with 360° Camera: if necessary, change the parking direction.
To start the parking procedure: confirm selected parking space 3.

The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking procedure begins. You are

responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

Pay attention to objects and other road users.
Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

If, forexample, the Please engage reverse gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.

During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are displayed in green in the camera image.

On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle message appears. Further manoeuvring may still be necessary.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.
You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be cancelled.

■ Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist

Requirements

• The vehicle is equipped with a 360° Camera.
- The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist.

Please note that you are responsible for the vehicle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure.

Start the vehicle.
Press the ① button.

The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Select Exit space ②.

or

If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: select direction of travel ③.
If, forexample, the Please engage forward gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission position.

The vehicle moves out of the parking space and is brought to a standstill by Active Parking Assist (at an angle to the direction of travel).

The Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle message appears.

Take control of the vehicle and complete the parking process.
The vehicle path shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path. The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the exiting procedure begins.

You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

Pausing Active Parking Assist

You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the following actions, forexample:

▶ Depress the brake pedal.
Open the front passenger door, a rear door, the boot or the bonnet.
Apply the electric parking brake or activating the HOLD function.
To resume the parking or exiting procedure: gently depress the accelerator pedal.

If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure.

Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the manoeuvring range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

Automatic braking function of Active Parking Assist

Persons or objects detected in the manoeuvring range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exiting procedure is resumed.

Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the manoeuvring range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

Manoeuvring assistant

Function of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a critical situation is detected, the △ symbol appears in the media display.

Drive Away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring assistance menu ( page 237).

You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 230).

WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.

Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action.

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

A risk of collision may occur in the following situations, forexample:

• If the accelerator and brake pedals are interchanged.
• If an incorrect transmission position is engaged.

Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions:

• If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.
- If you shift the transmission position to R or D when the vehicle is stationary.

• If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away.
• If the manoeuvring assistance function is activated in the multimedia system.

System limits

The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines.

When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist is not available.

Also observe the system limits of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 227).

Function of Cross Traffic Alert

Cross Traffic Alert is only available for vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any crossing traffic when reversing and manoeuvring out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the symbol appears in the media display and the vehicle can be braked automatically.

If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible.

Depending on the country, the cross traffic alert can be switched off or on in the menu Manoeuvring assistance ( page 237).

Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist ( page 212).

System limits

Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines. Cross Traffic Alert is not available when driving with a trailer.

Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assistance

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Assistance ▶ Camera & parking

▶ Activate/deactivate Manoeuvring assistance.

Trailer Manoeuvring Assist

Function of Trailer Manoeuvring Assist

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable trailers

Trailers with a steered axle or a fifth wheel cannot be used with Trailer Manoeuvring Assist.

Due to this, the trailer cannot be manoeuvred in the desired direction and you can cause a collision or the trailer can overturn.

Only use Trailer Manoeuvring Assist with trailers with fixed drawbars and axles.

NOTE Damage due to overhanging loads in front or drawbar installations

The vehicle and the trailer may be damaged during manoeuvring due to overhanging loads at the front of the trailer or drawbar installations.

Pay attention to overhanging loads or drawbar installations while manoeuvring.

Trailer Manoeuvring Assist assists you when reversing with a trailer. Using the reversing camera, it monitors the articulation angle between the vehicle and trailer and adjusts it to a specified value. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist also limits your speed.

Trailer Manoeuvring Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces.

You can either enter the articulation angle value directly via the multimedia system or use a straightening manoeuvre. When carrying out a straightening manoeuvre, the system calculates the articulation angle automatically and straightens the vehicle/trailer combination to the trailer's current direction.

Observe the notes on towing a trailer ( page 239).

System limits

Observe the system limits of the following functions:

• Active Parking Assist ( page 231)
• 360° Camera (→ page 223)
• Reversing camera ( page 221)

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

- The gradient is greater than approximately 15%.

Using Trailer Manoeuvring Assist

Requirements

• The vehicle has been started and is stationary.
• A trailer has been detected.
• The gradient is less than approximately 15%.
• The boot lid is closed.
• The electric parking brake is not applied.

Using Trailer Manoeuvring Assist

Engage reverse R gear.
Press the ① button.
The camera image is shown in the media display.
To adjust the articulation angle: select 📤. Swipe left or right on the media display or touchpad to change the articulation angle.

or

To activate the straightening manoeuvre: select ↓.
The system calculates the articulation angle in such a way that the direction of the trailer at the time of activation is maintained. There is a short countersteering movement of the trailer while the vehicle is reversed, which then guides it back to the desired line. In this way, the vehicle is aligned straight with the trailer and, at the same time, the direction of the trailer is maintained.
▶ Accelerate and brake as required.

The maximum articulation angle depends on the length of the trailer. This is calculated by the system by driving the vehicle forwards, including cornering. Before the length of the trailer has been calculated, the maximum articulation angle is approximately 23^ . The longer the trailer is, the higher the maximum articulation angle (max. approximately 60^ ).

Pay attention to your surroundings and be ready to brake at all times.

Trailer hitch

Notes on trailer operation

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

NOTE The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installation of trailer hitches

The installation - including retrofitting - of a non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the lighting system is prohibited.

Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of trailer hitches.

WARNING Risk of accident due to car/trailer combination swerving

If you drive too fast in trailer operation, the car/trailer combination may start to swerve.

This could cause you to lose control of the car/trailer combination. The car/trailer combination may even overturn.

▶ Under no circumstances should you try to straighten the car/trailer combination by increasing your speed.
▶ Reduce the speed and do not counter-steer.
Brake if necessary.

NOTE Damage to the engine as a result of overheating

If you retrofit a trailer hitch, modifications to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model.

When retrofitting a trailer hitch, observe the fastening points on the chassis.

Retrofitting a trailer hitch is permissible only if a trailer load is specified in your vehicle documents. If this is not the case, the vehicle is not approved for trailer operation.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the following notes on the tongue weight:

• Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible tongue weight
• Use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight

Do not exceed the following values:

• Permissible towing capacity
- Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle
- Permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle
• Permissible gross weight of the trailer
• Maximum permissible speed of the trailer

Ensure the following before starting a journey:

• The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle is set for a maximum load
• The lighting of the connected trailer is operational

- Vehicles without LED headlamps or MULTI-BEAM LED headlamps: the headlamps have been set correctly

In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/trailer combination must not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.

When you are reversing with a trailer, remember to use the Trailer Manoeuvring Assist function ( page 237).

Extending and retracting the ball neck fully electrically

WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged

If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.

Make sure that the ball neck securely engages and locks into place.

NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure

The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted.

Do not make the ball neck extend/retract faster by applying additional pressure.

NOTE Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck

When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch

If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle, the vehicle or the trailer hitch itself may be damaged in the process.

Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack).
Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a fixture for a towing eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is permitted.
When towing or tow-starting with the trailer hitch, observe the information in the section "Fitting and removing the towing eye."

Extending the ball neck fully electrically

▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Keep the swivel range free of objects.
Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.
Pull button ②. Indicator lamp ① will flash and the message Trailer coupling extending... will appear on the instrument display.

The ball neck will extend fully electrically.
Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. When indicator lamp ① is continuously lit, the ball neck is securely locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp ① will flash and the message Check trailer hitch lock will appear on the instrument display.

Retracting the ball neck fully electrically

Pull button ②. Indicator lamp ① will flash and the message Trailer coupling extending... will appear on the instrument display.
The ball neck will retract fully electrically.
Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. When indicator lamp ① goes out, the ball neck is securely locked in place.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp ① will flash and the message Check trailer hitch lock will appear on the instrument display.

Observe the information about the displays on the instrument display:

• Indicator and warning lamps (→ page 432)
• Display messages (→ page 374)

Extending and retracting the ball neck fully electrically (multimedia system)

WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged

If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.

Always engage the ball neck as described.

NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure

The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted.

Do not make the ball neck extend/retract faster by applying additional pressure.

Requirements:

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
• The swivel range is clear.

- The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been removed.

Multimedia system:

Settings Quick access

Extending the ball neck fully electrically

Select [icon]. The Trailer coupling extending... display message will appear on the multifunction display. The ball neck will extend fully electrically.
Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.

If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Check trailer hitch lock message will appear on the multifunction display.

Retracting the ball neck fully electrically

Select 📄. The Trailer coupling extending... display message will appear on the multifunction display. The ball neck will retract fully electrically.
▶ Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.

If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Check trailer hitch lock message will appear on the multifunction display.

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer

WARNING Risk of injury due to a change in vehicle level

Vehicles with level control system: the vehicle level may be changed unintentionally, e.g. by other persons. If you couple or uncouple the trailer during this time, you may become trapped. In addition, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle. Observe the following when coupling or uncoupling:

Do not open or close any doors or the boot lid.
Do not initiate the level control system and do not operate the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Do not lock or unlock the vehicle.

The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehicle only if the following conditions are met:

• The ball neck is extended and engaged in a securely locked position.
• Vehicles with level control system: ensure the vehicle is at the normal level ( page 219).
  Use the normal level in trailer operation. High-level driving is not permitted in trailer operation on public roads.

Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the vehicle with the following adapters:

• Adapter plug
• Adapter cable

The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehicle only if the following conditions are met:

• The trailer is connected correctly.
• The trailer lighting system is in working order.

A correctly connected trailer influences, among other things, the functions of the following systems:

- ESP® trailer stabilisation

• Trailer Manoeuvring Assist
• Active Lane Keeping Assist
- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
• Active Parking Assist
• Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist
- Drive Away Assist
• Cross Traffic Alert
- Reversing camera
- 360^ camera
• AIR BODY CONTROL

Coupling up a trailer

NOTE Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge

Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the starter battery.

Do not use the vehicle's power supply to charge the trailer battery.

▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.
Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.

Open the socket cap.
Insert the plug with lug ① into groove ③ on the socket.
Turn bayonet coupling ② to the right as far as it will go.
Let the cap engage.
Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties (only if you are using an adapter cable).

Make sure that the cable is always slack for ease of movement during cornering.
In the following circumstances, a message may appear on the instrument display even if the trailer has been connected correctly:
- LEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting system.
- The current has fallen below the trailer lighting system's minimum current (50 mA).
① Accessories can be connected to the permanent power supply up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock.

Uncoupling a trailer

WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer

When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.

Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

NOTE Damage during uncoupling with an engaged overrun brake

The vehicle may be damaged if you uncouple with an engaged overrun brake.

Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when disconnecting the trailer cable

Vehicles with level control system: the vehicle may lower when you disconnect the trailer cable.

This could result in other people becoming trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you disconnect the trailer cable.

NOTE Damage to the rear bumper from installing adapter cables or adapter plugs

The following parts could be damaged when swiveling the ball neck fully electrically:

- Bumper

- Adapter cable

- Adapter plug

Always remove the adapter cable or adapter plug before swiveling the ball neck fully electrically.

▶ Secure the trailer against rolling away.
Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.
Uncouple the trailer.
Place the cover cap on the ball head.
(i) Trailers with LED lighting: after uncoupling the trailer, switch the vehicle on and then off again.

Bicycle rack function

WARNING Risk of an accident if the bicycle rack is used incorrectly

The bicycle rack may become detached from the vehicle in the following cases:

• the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch is exceeded.
  • the bicycle rack is used incorrectly.
• the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck beneath the ball head.

Observe the following for your own safety and that of other road users:

• always adhere to the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch.
- always observe the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle.
- use the bicycle rack only to transport bicycles.

• always mount the bicycle rack properly by attaching to the ball head and the ball neck guide pin, if possible.
• when transporting four bicycles, always use bicycle racks that have additional support on the ball neck guide pin.
  • use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz.
  • always observe the bicycle rack operating instructions.

NOTE Damage to or breakage of the trailer hitch due to unsuitable or improperly used bicycle rack.
Only use bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz properly as described below.
NOTE Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball

neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.

NOTE The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installation of trailer hitches

The installation - including retrofitting - of a non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the lighting system is prohibited.

Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of trailer hitches.

Trailer hitch with additional guide pin

Depending on the bicycle rack's design, different numbers of bicycles can be transported.

The following bicycle rack designs are possible:

- When mounted by attaching to ball head ①, the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. You can transport up to three bicycles.

- When mounted on ball head ① and guide pin ②, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg. You can transport up to four bicycles.

The maximum load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load.

Observe the notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle ( page 157).

When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle.

Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in the tyre pressure table ( page 342).

Notes on loading

The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load on the trailer hitch.

Observe the following notes:

• mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible
• always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible across the vehicle's longitudinal axis

Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats, rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerodynamic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicycle rack.

Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check them at regular intervals to ensure that they are secure.

Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on the trailer hitch will increase.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Load distribution on the bicycle rack

① Vertical distance between centre of gravity and ball head
2 Horizontal distance between centre of gravity and ball head
③ The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre axis.

Observe the following information when loading the bicycle rack:

Loading the bicycle rack

3 bicycles 4 bicycles
Total weight of bicycle rack and load	Up to 75 kg Up to 100 kg
Max. distance1	420 mm 420 mm
Max. distance2	300 mm 400 mm

When transporting four bicycles or a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle racks with additional support on both trailer hitch guide pins.

Vehicle towing instructions

The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guar-

anteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side.

Observe the following information:

• Permitted towing methods ( page 332)
- The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground ( page 332)

Notes on the instrument display and on-board computer

WARNING Risk of accident if the instrument display fails

If the instrument display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected.

The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.

▶ Drive on carefully.
Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

A WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

The on-board computer shows only display messages and warnings from specific systems on the instrument display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always safe to operate.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and in accordance with the traffic conditions. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of instrument display

Speedometer

The segments on the speedometer indicate the statuses of the following systems: cruise control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

② Index points

3 Outside temperature

4 Time

Area for additional values (example: rev counter): rev counter/navigation/ECO display/consumption/G-meter/date The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the rev counter (overrevving range) is reached.

6 Coolant temperature display

During normal operation, the coolant temperature display is permitted to rise to 120°C. Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: POWER and CHARGE displays (electrical drive support and recuperation power of the electric motor)

⑦ Selected drive program

B Selected transmission position

Centre display area of the instrument display (example: standard display for a trip): assistance/telephone/navigation/trip/media/radio/styles and displays/service/possible settings for head-up display
⑩ Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indicator

Overview of buttons on the steering wheel

Depending on the equipment, the layout and the design of the control elements on the steering wheel may differ.

Control panel for cruise control/limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 192)
② Back button, on-board computer
3 Touch Control, on-board computer To navigate: swipe
To confirm: press OK
4 Main menu, on-board computer

5 Home screen, MBUX multimedia system
6 Touch Control, MBUX multimedia system To navigate: swipe
To confirm: press OK
⑦ Back button, MBUX multimedia system
8 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system
LINGUATRONIC
To adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting

Operating the on-board computer

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

The on-board computer is operated using the left-hand Touch Control and the left-hand back/home button.

To operate Touch Control in the most effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible.

The following menus are available:

• Assistance
• Telephone
• Navigation
• Trip
• Radio
  Media
• Service

• Vehicles with an instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: Design
You can find information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Owner's Manual.
The menus can be called up from the menu bar on the instrument display.
To call up the menu bar: press the left-hand back button until the menu bar is displayed.
Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.
To scroll on the menu bar: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
To call up a menu, submenu or possible settings on the menu, or confirm a selection or setting: press the left-hand Touch Control.
To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a function, an entry or a display: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To exit a submenu: press the left-hand back button.

Operating the head-up display

To switch on the head-up display: swipe upwards on the menu bar on the left-hand Touch Control.
To switch to the head-up display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To set the display areas of the head-up display: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

Displaying full-screen menus

You can display the following menus full-screen on the instrument display:

• Assistance
• Trip
• Navigation
  On the corresponding menu, use the left-hand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list.
  Press the left-hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed full-screen.

Overview of displays on the instrument display

Displays on the instrument display:

u Active Parking Assist activated (/ pag e 233)
é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ pag e 230)
h Cruise control (/ pag e 190)
È Limiter (/ pag e 191)
ζ Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ pag e 194)
ê Active Brake Assist (/ pag e 208)
à Active Steering Assist (/ pag e 201)
Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ pag e 201)
A Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ pag e 215)
READY Operational readiness of the 48 V on-board electrical system drive system
(A) ECO start/stop function (/ pag e 160)
ë HOLD function (/ pag e 187)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ pag e 131)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 132)

120km/h Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)

Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and trace signs (/ page 209).

Vehicles with Tra c Sign Assist: detected instructions and tra c signs (/ page 210).

For an overview of the indicator and warning lamps, see (/ page 432).

Head-up display

Function of the head-up display

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

The head-up display projects the following information into the driver's eld of vision above the cockpit, for example:

R Driving speed
R Information from the navigation system
R Information from the driving systems and driving safety systems
R Some warning messages

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, different content may be shown in the three areas of the head-up display (/ page 254).

Display content

Navigation instructions
2 Current speed
3 Detected instructions and traffic signs
4 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise control)

System limits

The visibility of the displays will be affected by the following conditions:

• Seat position
  • Image position setting

• Light conditions

• Wet road surface

• Objects on the display cover
  • Polarisation in sunglasses
  In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by switching the head-up display off and on again.

Setting the head-up display using the on-board computer

On-board computer:

HEAD-UP DISPLAY

The following head-up display settings or displays can be selected or shown:

• Position
• Brightness
• Messages
• Assistance status
• Telephone
• Audio
  • LINGUATRONIC

To select the settings menu: swipe to the right on the left-hand Touch Control. The Settings menu ⑤ will be selected.
To call up the Settings menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.
To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.

Setting messages, assistance status, telephone, audio and LINGUATRONIC

Press the left-hand Touch Control. The list of setting options will be displayed.
Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To choose settings: press the left-hand Touch Control.

Selecting what the head-up display shows

(Example)

To switch the head-up display on/off

2 Left display area

Navigation system

Average consumption

G-meter

Central display area

Speedometer

Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control

Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning

4 Right display area

Traffic Sign Assist

Assistant display

5 To adjust the position, brightness and lower display area

6 Index points

⑦ Lower display area (example: left display area)

You can hide display areas ② to ④ that are not required.

In audio mode, the station name or track will be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the latest calls will be displayed when the telephone list on the instrument display is actively operated.

Swipe upwards on left-hand Touch Control.

Press the left-hand Touch Control.

Switching the head-up display on/off via the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Settings Quick access

Select HUD.

The head-up-display is activated.

Overview and operation

Notes on the MBUX multimedia system

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Depending on the equipment, the scope of function and product designation of your MBUX multimedia system may differ from the description and

images in this Owner's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all equipment variants.

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system

① Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system
② Media display with touch functionality

3 Switch panel with buttons for telephone, navigation, radio/media, vehicle functions/system settings and favourites/themes
4 Controller

Turn: adjusts the volume

Press: switches sound on or off

For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Performance exhaust system:

• Turn: adjusts the volume
• Press briefly: switches the mute function on/off
• Press and hold: switches the multimedia system on/off

Switches the MBUX multimedia system or media display on or off For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Performance exhaust system:

button

- Sets the sound characteristic of the AMG Performance exhaust system

6 Touchpad

Further operating options:

• Conducting a voice dialogue with LINGUA-TRONIC.
• Operating functions contact-free with the MBUX Interior Assistant.

You can find further information about operation as well as about applications and services in the Digital Owner's Manual.

Anti-theft protection

This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. More detailed information about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Home screen overview

Depending on the display, calls up the first three applications or the home screen
2 Calls up the profile
③ Calls up the global search
4 SOS NOT READY (only when the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is not available)
5 Mercedes me connect active
6 Transmission of vehicle position active

⑦ Signal strength of the mobile phone network, network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time
Calls up the Notifications Centre
9 Calls up an application using the symbol
10 Application and current information
⑪ Quick-access, e.g. enter home address
12 Index points and selected display area

13 Calls up the air conditioning menu

14 Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and FAVOURITES

If Mercedes me connect ⑤ is active, the vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. Vehicle data is then transmitted to the back end system. What data is transmitted depends on which services are activated. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is country-dependent. If transmission of vehicle position ⑥ is active, Mercedes me connect services have been activated for this vehicle which access the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances the geoposition is transmitted depends on the particular services. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is country-dependent.

Operating the MBUX multimedia system

Using Touch Control

① Shows the home screen
2 Touch Control
Swipe up, down, to the left and right (to navigate) and press (to confirm)
Returns to the previous display

Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control ② with single-finger swipes.

To select a menu option: swipe and press.
To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.

Using the touchscreen

Select menu options, symbols or characters by pressing briefly.
To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right.
To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen.
To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.
To call up the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears.
① For more information on operation, please refer to the Digital Owner's Manual.

Using the touchpad and controller

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Equipment with touchpad

Returns to the previous display
2 Calls up the audio control menu
3 Calls up the home screen
④ Touchpad

Equipment with touchpad with controller

Returns to the previous display
2 Controller
3 Calls up the home screen
4 Touchpad
5 Calls up the home screen
6 Calls up the audio control menu
⑦ Returns to the previous display

The equipment with touchpad and controller is not available in all countries.

Perform the operation according to the equipment.

Operating the touchpad (examples):

• To select a menu option, swipe and press.
- If handwriting recognition is active, write a character on the touchpad.
- Swipe down or up with two fingers. The Notifications Centre is opened or closed.
- Move two fingers apart or together on the map. The map scale is increased or decreased.

Operating the controller:

• Turn (◎) anti-clockwise or clockwise.
• Slide ←◎→ left or right.
• Slide ↑◎↓ up or down.
• Slide ◎ diagonally.
• Press ⚙ briefly or press and hold.

Calling up applications using buttons

① TEL button calls up the telephone
2 NAVI button calls up navigation
3 RADIO MEDIA button calls up radio or media
④ button calls up vehicle functions
5 ★ button
Press briefly: calls up favourites Press and hold: adds a favourite or creates a new theme
Alternatively, tap 📋 on the touchscreen.
▶ Call up the application ( page 258).

Functions of LINGUATRONIC

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system:

- Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving.

• If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be delayed.
• Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. With LINGUATRONIC, various applications in the MBUX multimedia system are operable using voice input. LINGUATRONIC is operational approximately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat.

The following multimedia system applications can be operated:

- Telephone

• Text message and e-mail

- Navigation

- Address book

- Radio

• Media

• TV

- Vehicle functions

Starting LINGUATRONIC

Press rocker switch ① up.

or

Say "Hello Mercedes".

Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant

WARNING Risk of injury from the camera's laser radiation

This product uses a classification 1 laser system. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina.

Do not open the housing.

Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a qualified specialist workshop.

This device is a class 1 laser product in accordance with IEC 60825-1:2014 and DIN EN 60825-1:2014.

The camera is located in the overhead control panel.

If the vehicle is fitted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiate between driver and front passenger interactions and detects specific hand positions (poses).

System limits, display messages and notes for rectification

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

- The camera in the overhead control panel may heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch off temporarily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures.

Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again.

- The camera is covered, dirty, misted up or scratched.

Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera lens.

Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use microfibre cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning.

- Recognition can be impaired by reflective clothing, an adverse colour of clothing or by accessories, for example.

- Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may be limiting the detection area of the camera.

- Keep the camera's field of vision clear. - The camera is not operational.

Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions:

Interaction area Interaction Description
In front of the media display or above the touchpad	Proximity to the control element The Interior Assistant recognises the approach of the hand towards a control element.Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions differentiate between driver and front passenger.No specific hand position is required.
Above the centre console	Defined pose	A favourite is called up with a defined pose.
Below the inside rearview mirror	Brief up and down movements	With brief up and down movements below the inside rearview mirror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on or off.
Above the front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat		By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is switched off again.

Switching the reading light and search light and on or off

Requirements:

- For the reading light:

The function is available when it is dark.

- The hand movement takes place in the interaction area below the inside rearview mirror.

- For the search light:

- The function is available when it is dark.

- The hand movement takes place in the interaction area above the front passenger seat.

- The seat belt on the front passenger seat must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle.

Switching the reading light on and off

Briefly move a hand up or down beneath the inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or off for the driver or the front passenger.

Switching the search light on and off

To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand.
The search light is switched on for the driver.
To switch off: take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched off again.

Information on profiles, themes, suggestions and favourites

For electrically adjustable seats observe the following notes.

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile

Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.

Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If a person is in danger of becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by:

a) Tapping the warning message on the media display.

or

b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped.

The driver's seat is equipped with an access preventer.

If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. Profiles store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own profile without changing the stored profile settings of other drivers.

i Information on profiles from Mercedes me connect can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual.

Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate control and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multi-media system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favourites.

For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the motorway, you can save your preferred settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive program, for example.

The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then offers suggestions for the most probable

navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The pre-requirements for that are the selection of a profile, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data.

Favourites provide quick access to applications that are used often. You can select favourites from categories or add them directly to an application.

Configuring profiles, themes and suggestions

Multimedia system:

Creating a new profile

Select + Create profile.
Select an avatar.
Enter the name and confirm with OK.
Select Continue >.
▶ Select Current settings.
Select Save.

Activate Bluetooth ^® and select Connect phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user profile.
Select Finished.

Selecting profile options

Select ⋯ for a profile.

The following functions are available:

• Editing, resetting or deleting a profile
- Resetting themes or favourites
- Configuring suggestions

Configuring suggestions

Select ⋯ for a profile.
Select Suggestions settings.
Switch Allow destination suggestions, Allow music suggestions and Allow contact suggestions on or off.
To deactivate the learning function for one day: activate Deact. learn. for 24h. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active profile. Suggestions will continue to be shown.

Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calculated, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function.

Creating new themes

Select
Select THEMES.
Select + Set theme. The settings saved in the theme are shown.
Select Continue ▷.
Select Audio and Navigation and store the active settings in the theme.
Select Continue ▷.
Select an entry screen.
Select Continue ▷.
Select an image.
Enter the names into the entry field and confirm with OK.
Select Save.

System settings

Overview of the system settings menu

In the system settings menu, you can make settings in the following menus and control elements:

• Display:

• Styles
• Instrument lighting
  Display brightness
• Edge lighting
• Day/night design

- Control elements:

• Keyboard language and handwriting recognition
• Sensitivity of the touchpad
• Sensitivity of the Touch Controls

• LINGUATRONIC

- Sound

• Entertainment
  Navigation and traffic announcements

- Telephone

Voice amplification to the rear

• Connectivity:
• Wi-Fi, Bluetooth ^® , NFC
• Time & date
• Language
• Units for distance
• Software updates
• Data import/export
• PIN protection
• System reset

Information on important system updates

Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured.
A system update consists of three steps:

• Downloading or copying of the data required for installation
  • Installation of the downloaded system update

• Activation of the downloaded system update by restarting the system
  If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded automatically.

The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available.

You have the following selection options:

- Accept and install

The system update will be downloaded in the background.

• Information

Information about the pending system update is displayed.

- Later

The system update can be downloaded manually at a later time.

Deep system updates

Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off.

If the download of a deep system update is complete and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the next ignition cycle, for example.

① Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation.

Requirements for the installation:

• The vehicle is switched off.
- Notes and warnings have been read and accepted.
• The electric parking brake has been applied.

If all requirements have been fulfilled, the downloaded system update is installed. The multimedia system cannot be operated while the downloaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted.

If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to resolve the problem.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

Requirements:

• To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the multimedia system with external hotspots: your vehicle does not have a permanently installed communication module.
• The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described.

Multimedia system:

Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi

Select Wi-Fi.

Connecting the multimedia system with an external hot spot using Wi-Fi

The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

The connection procedure may differ depending on the device. Follow the instructions that are shown in the display. Further information

can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.

▶ Select Internet settings.
▶ Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
Select Add hotspot.

Connecting using a QR code

Select the options ▷ of the desired Wi-Fi network.
▶ Select Connect using QR code.
Scan the displayed QR code with the device to be connected. The Wi-Fi connection is established.

Connecting using a security key

Select the options ▷ of the desired Wi-Fi network.
▶ Select Connect using security key.
Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Enter this security key on the multimedia system.

Confirm the entry with ok.

Connecting using a WPS PIN

Select the options ▷ of the desired Wi-Fi network.
▶ Select Connect using WPS PIN input. The multimedia system generates an eight-digit PIN.
Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.
Confirm the entry.

Connecting using a button

Select the options ▶ of the desired Wi-Fi network.
Select Connect via WPS PBC.
Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Press the WPS button on the device to be connected.
▶ Select Continue in the multimedia system.

Activating automatic connection

▶ Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
Select the options ▷ of the desired Wi-Fi network.
▶ Activate Permanent Internet connection.

Connecting with a known Wi-Fi network

▶ Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
Select a Wi-Fi network. The connection is established again.

Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot for external devices

The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

▶ Select Vehicle hotspot.
Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.

Connecting using WPS PIN generation

Select Connect using WPS PIN generation.

Enter the PIN shown in the media display on the device to be connected and confirm.

Connecting using WPS PIN entry

▶ Select Connect using WPS PIN input.
Enter the PIN that is shown on the external device's display on the multimedia system.

Connecting using a button

Select Connect via WPS PBC.
Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Select Continue.

Connecting using a security key

Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot. A security key is displayed.
Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name.
Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected.
Confirm the entry.

Connecting using NFC

▶ Select Connect via NFC.
Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Hold the device to be connected at the vehicle's NFC interface.
Select Finished. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.

Generating a new security key

▶ Select Vehicle hotspot.
▶ Select Generate security key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key.
To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-established, the new security key must be entered.

System language

Notes on the system language

This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English.

Setting the system language

Multimedia system:

Set the language.

If you are using Arabic map data, the text information can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do so, select العربية as the language from the language list. Navigation announcements are then also made in Arabic.

Resetting the multimedia system (reset function)

WARNING Risk of accidents due to failure of multimedia display functions

While the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the reversing camera are not available.

Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is stationary.

Multimedia system:

Personal data is deleted, for example:

• Station presets
• Connected mobile phones
  • Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connection
• Individual user profiles

(i) The guest profile is reset when the settings are restored to the factory settings.

① Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset.

A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset.

Select Yes.

The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. If you have set a PIN for your system, this will also be reset.

Navigation

Notes on navigation

Route guidance with augmented reality

WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display

The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving.

Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation.

Avoid extended observation of the camera image.

To show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information

The additional information from the augmented reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation.

Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving manoeuvres.

Switching navigation on

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Alternatively: press the NAV MAP button. The map displays the current vehicle position. The navigation menu is shown. The navigation menu is hidden if route guidance is active.

Navigation overview

Example: digital map with navigation menu
① Enters a POI or address and additional destination entry options
2 Interrupts route guidance (if route guidance is active)
3 Repeats a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or off
4 Calls up the ON ROUTE menu

• To show Route overview
• To select Alternative routes
• Report traffic incident (Car-to-X)
• To call up the TRAFFIC menu
- To display Traffic announcements
- To display Area announcements
- To display Provider information

• To show Route list
• To call up the POSITION menu
- Store position
- To display Compass
- To show Qibla (available in selected countries)

5 Quick-access and settings

• To show Traffic
• To show Parking
  • To show Motorway information

• Via Advanced options to use View, Announcements and Route

Entering a destination

Multimedia system:

→ ↗ Navigation ↗ Where to?

① Country in which the vehicle is located
② Entering a POI or address
3 List with additional destination entry options
4 Deletes an entry
5 OK Confirms an entry

6 Switches to handwriting recognition
⑦ Enters a space
8 Switches to voice input
Sets the written language

10 Switches to digits, special characters and symbols
⑪ Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
Enter the destination in ②. The entries can be made in any order.

The following entries can be made, for example:

• Town, street, house number
- Street, town
- Postcode
• POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking
- Contact name

Select a search result in list ③.
Calculate the route ( page 274).
You can find further information about destination entry, e.g. three-word addresses, in the Digital Owner's Manual.

Changing country

Select the country indicator in ①.
Enter the country indicator.
Select the country in ③.

Using online search

(i) Requirements: the media display shows an Internet connection in the status line with the symbol.

Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search finds no suitable destinations or if you change countries, the online search is available.

For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a three-word address.

Enter the destination in input line 2.
The search results are displayed.
▶ Select the destination in the list.
The detailed view for the route is displayed.

or

Select country indicator ①.
Select the provider for the online service from the countries list.
Enter the destination in input line ②.
▶ Select the destination in the list.

Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance

Requirements

• The destination has been entered.
• The destination address is shown.

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

① ▲ No route yet.

A route has been mapped.

Select ▲.

The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins.

or

Select
Select Set as intermediate dest.. The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination.

or

Select Start new route guidance. The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins.

Selecting route settings

Select
Select Advanced.
Select Route.
Select the route type.
Take traffic information into consideration with Dynamic route guidance ▶.
Select route options with Avoid options.
Activate Suggest alternative route. Alternative routes are calculated for every route.
Activate Activate commuter route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output.

Activating route guidance with augmented reality

During route guidance, tap on the camera symbol on the media display.
The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning manoeuvre and will show additional information.
To return to the navigation map: tap on the camera symbol again.

Displaying additional information in the camera image

Select
Select Advanced.
▶ Select Augmented Reality.
Activate Street names and House numbers. During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image.

Using map functions

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Setting the map scale

To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one finger on the media display.
To zoom out: tap with two fingers on the media display.

Moving the map

Move one finger in any direction on the touchscreen.
To reset the map to the current vehicle position: press ⏻ briefly.

Selecting map orientation

Tap repeatedly on the compass symbol on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D heading up to 2D north up.

Switching motorway information on/off

Select

▶ Activate or deactivate Motorway information.

Using services

Requirements

• There is an Internet connection.
- Mercedes me connect is available.
- You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal.
- The vehicle is connected to a user account and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service.
Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
- The service is available and has been activated.
- The following additional conditions apply to the Parking service:
The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
- The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Displaying the traffic situation with Live Traffic Information

Select
Activate Traffic.
Select Advanced.
Select View.
Select Map elements.
Activate Traffic incidents, Free-flowing traffic and Delay.
If traffic information has been received, then traffic incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages are displayed.
The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration.

Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-X-Communication

If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display

depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traffic incidents options.

Set the options. If Traffic is switched off and Traffic incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route.

Displaying weather information and other map contents

Select
Select Advanced.
Select View.
Select Map elements.
▶ Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CONTENTS category.
Switch on a service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.

Parking service

! NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head-room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.
Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to observe local information and parking conditions

The data is based on the information provided by the respective service providers.

Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accuracy of the information provided in relation to the car park or parking area.

Always observe the local information and conditions.

① This service is not available in all countries.

Select 🙏 and activate Parking.

Tap on P in the map.

Select a parking option. The map shows the parking options in the vicinity.

The following information is displayed (if available):

- Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and arrival time

• Information on the car park, e.g.

Opening times
- Parking charges
- Current occupancy
- Maximum parking time
Maximum access height

The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual circumstances.

• Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards)
• Details on parking tariffs
• Number of available parking spaces
• Payment method (e.g. at parking meters)
• Services/facilities at the parking option
- Telephone number

Calculate the route ( page 274).

Notes on the dashcam

NOTE Risk of legal consequences following violation of legal regulations and data protection requirements

You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions.

The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated.

This function is not permitted in all countries.

Before using the dashcam, read up on the content of the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements in the respective country of use.
▶ Observe the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements.

Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam

Requirements:

- At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system.

Multimedia system:

Mercedes me & Apps
Dashcam
Select the USB device.

When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video files are not always displayed in the recording list. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition.

Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam

Requirements:

• A USB device is connected with the multimedia system.
  • The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

Mercedes me & Apps

Dashcam

If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device ( page 278).
▶ Select the Individual recording or Loop recording recording mode. If Individual recording is selected and the memory is full the recording stops.

If Loop recording has been selected, several short video files are recorded. When the memory limit is reached, the oldest video file is deleted and recording is continued automatically.

To start: select Start recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device.
To end: select End recording.

A report may appear in the following cases:

• For the Individual recording recording mode: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently. Change the USB device or delete a video file.
• If a video recording has started and a national border is detected, the National border crossed. Please observe the countryspecific regulations regarding video recording. message appears.
  This function is not available in all countries.

- The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears.

Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Telephone

Telephony

Notes on telephony

WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road

and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

A WARNING Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when the vehicle is stationary.
As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly:

- Loading the vehicle (→ page 112)

Bluetooth ^® connection:

The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth ^® profile of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth ^® profiles:

• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)

The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.

• MAP (Message Access Profile)

The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system.

Irrespective of this, Bluetooth ^® audio functionality can be used with any mobile radio unit.

For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manufacturer's operating instructions.

Network connection:

The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion:

• You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free.
• The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available
• A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time

The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice ^® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice ^® .

Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.

Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

Telephone menu overview

Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)
3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
5 Options

6 Device manager
7 Messages
8 Numerical pad
9 Contact search

Telephony operating modes overview
Depending on your equipment, the following telephony operating modes are available:
- A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®.

- Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode).

• You can use all the functions of the multi-media system with the mobile phone in the foreground.
• You can receive incoming calls and messages with the mobile phone in the background.

You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background.

- A mobile phone is connected as the car phone.

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements

• Bluetooth ^ is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
• Bluetooth ^ is activated on the multimedia system.

Multimedia system:

Searching for a mobile phone

Select

Select Connect new device.

Connecting a mobile phone

Authorisation follows using secure simple pairing.

Select a mobile phone.

A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.

functions in the telephony menu

In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example:

- Making calls, e.g.:

Accept a call

End call

Create conferen. call

Accept or reject a waiting call

• Managing contacts, e.g.:

• Downloading mobile phone contacts
  Managing the format of a contact's name
• Saving a contact as a favourite

• Receiving and sending messages, e.g.:

• Using the read-aloud function
• Dictating a new message

Mercedes me app

Mercedes me calls

Making a call via the overhead control panel
Mercedes me calls are not possible in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.

me button for service or information calls

② SOS button cover

3 SOS button (emergency call system)

Making a Mercedes me call

Press me button 1.

Making an emergency call

To open the cover of SOS button ②, press it briefly.
Press and hold SOS button ③ for at least one second.

If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.

Information about the Mercedes me call

A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system ( page 282).

Using the voice dialogue system you access the desired service:

• Accident and Breakdown Management
• Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehicle

You can find information on the following topics:

• Activation of Mercedes me connect
- Operating the vehicle

• Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
• Other products and services from Mercedes-Benz

Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre ( page 285).

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system

Requirements

• Access to a mobile phone network is available.
• The contract partner's mobile network coverage is available in the respective region.
• The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically.

Multimedia system:

▶ Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display.

Then you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre after automatic accident or breakdown detection

Requirements:

• The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation.
  • The vehicle is stationary.
  • The hazard warning lights are switched on.

This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances.

Requirements for collision detection in the context of accident management:

• The vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (code 551).
• The vehicle is equipped with the interior protection (code 882).
• The vehicle is equipped with the Anti-Theft Protection Package (code P54).

- The collision detection service with theft notification has been activated on Mercedes me connect.

If a collision is detected when the tow-away protection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on.

Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if this functions is available in your country.

In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. This may take a few seconds.

The availability of collision detection depends on the vehicle.

In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display.

After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

Select Call.

• After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically ( page 287).
• The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises the breakdown and accident assistance.

You may be charged for these services.

Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls ( page 292).
In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.

If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later.

The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.

Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call

If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle.

Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment.

To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer

centre takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet.

This will contact you to confirm the appointment and if necessary consult about the details.

① If you select Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time.

Giving consent to data transfer during a Mercedes me call

Requirements

- There is an active Mercedes me call via the multimedia system or the me button in the overhead control panel (→ page 282).

The prompt to confirm data transfer does not appear in all countries.

If the Accident/Breakdown Management and Maintenance Management services are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do you want to transmit vehicle data and the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in order to

improve the processing of your request? message is shown.

The exact phrase may differ depending on the multimedia system installed.

Select Yes.

- The relevant vehicle data is sent automatically ( page 285).

or

▶ Select No and confirm.

- Only call control data is transmitted (→ page 285).

More information on Mercedes me: https://www.mercedes.me

Data transferred during a Mercedes me call When you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and a smooth service.

The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data:

• The vehicle is switched on.
- The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider.

- The quality of the mobile connection is sufficient.

Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors:

• Reason for the initiation of the call
- The available mobile phone transmission technology
• The activated Mercedes me connect services
- The service selected in the voice control system

A prompt for consent to the data transfer only occurs if the corresponding Mercedes me connect service is not activated.

The scope of the transmitted data depends on the vehicle model and equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times.

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are not activated

If no Mercedes me connect services are activated and the data protection prompt has been confirmed the following data is transmitted:

• Vehicle identification number
- Time of the call
- Reason for the initiation of the call
• Confirmation of the data protection prompt
• Country indicator of the vehicle
- Set language for the multimedia system
- Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted:

• Current mileage and maintenance data

If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted:

• Current mileage and maintenance data

• Current vehicle location

If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system and no service has been activated, but the data protection query has been confirmed, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre:

• Current vehicle location

If the data protection prompt has been rejected, the following data is transmitted to enable targeted advice and an efficient service:

• Reason for the initiation of the call
• Rejection of the data protection prompt
  • Country indicator of the vehicle
• Set language for the multimedia system
• Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are activated

Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service.

An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data processing

The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services.

The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

The recorded message is not available in every country.

Mercedes me connect

Information on Mercedes me connect

Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes me connect services are not available in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.

Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services.

You can use the following services via the multi-media system and the overhead control panel, for example:

• Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system)
  • Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System (automatic emergency call and SOS button)

The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are available to you around the clock.

The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel ( page 282).

You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system ( page 283).

Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 292).

Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Information on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management

(i) Accident and Breakdown Management is not available in every country. Contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether this function is available in your country.

The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions:

• Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (→ page 292)
  If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all countries.
• Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre. You may be charged for these services.
• Addition to the emergency guide after automatic accident or breakdown detection ( page 284)
  In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance.

- Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics

With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics.

If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.

These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia system.

Please note that the service and breakdown call is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, be sure to contact the usual national emergency

number first or use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 291).

More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data transferred during Mercedes me connect call services

The data transferred during a Mercedes me connect call depends on:

• The reason for initiation of the call
- The service that is selected in the voice control system
• The activated Mercedes me connect services

You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu

When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you.

For more information consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

① Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me apps updated.

You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system.

In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available:

• Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me user account
• Deleting a connection between a user account Mercedes me and the vehicle
• Calling up the Mercedes me services
• Calling up apps such as, In-Car Office or the web browser depending on availability

Overview of In-Car Office

Using In-Car Office, you can connect your online services to the multimedia system.

Requirements for In-Car Office

• Your mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system ( page 282).
• You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal.
• The In-Car Office service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
• You have a user account with an online service, e.g. with Office 365 or Gmail, and have connected the user account to In-Car Office.

In-Car Office functions

• Display pending appointments in the calendar
- Reading out calendar entries
- Calling stored telephone numbers
- Navigating to appointments with navigable destinations
- Deleting a calendar entry

• Display and selection of tasks and calls to complete
• Reading aloud
• Calling stored telephone numbers
• Deleting
• Noting calls
• Declining incoming calls and saving as a task in the Tasks & calls menu
• Marking entry in Tasks & calls as completed
• Managing e-mails
• Showing/reading e-mails
• Writing and forwarding e-mails
  (i) You can start the In-Car Office function using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. Please note that certain functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary.

Web browser overview

The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu.

① URL entry
2 Bookmarks
3 Web page, back
4 Web page, forwards
5 To refresh/stop
6 Options
① Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.

Overview of Smartphone Integration

With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multimedia system display.

Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with Smartphone Integration, only one additional

mobile phone can be connected via Bluetooth® to the multimedia system.

The full range of functions for Smartphone Integration is only possible with an internet connection. The appropriate application must be downloaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the symbol on the multimedia system using a suitable cable.

Apps for Smartphone Integration

• Apple CarPlay®
• Android Auto

For safety reasons, the first activation of Smartphone Integration on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake is applied.

You can start Apple CarPlay ^® or Android Auto from the device manager.
① Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview of transferred vehicle data

When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible.

The following system information is transmitted:

• Software release of the multimedia system
• System ID (anonymised)

The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone.

To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated.

This has no connection to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset ( page 270).

The following driving status data is transmitted:

• Transmission position engaged
• Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving
• Day/night mode of the instrument display
- Drive type

The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation.

The following position data is transmitted:

• Coordinates
• Speed
• Compass direction

- Acceleration direction

This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel).

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Information on the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the relevant contract partner. Insufficient network coverage from the relevant contract partner may result in an emergency call not being transmitted.

The vehicle must be switched on before an automatic emergency call can be made.

The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is activated at the factory. Using the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is free of charge.

Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can help to decisively reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access.

An emergency call can be made automatically ( page 292) or manually ( page 293). Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.

You can find more information on the regional availability of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/extra/ecall/

Messages on the display

The following messages appear in the display:

- SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls can still be transmitted.

The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is switched on.

- SOS: the icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.

If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loudspeakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are faulty.

You can recognise a fault in the emergency call system by the following displays:

- A corresponding message will also appear in the Instrument Display.

• The Me button lights up red continuously.

Triggering an automatic Mercedes-Benz emergency call

Requirements:

• The vehicle is switched on.

• The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system triggers an emergency call automatically in the following cases:

• After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt tensioners after an accident

The emergency call has been made:

• A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

- A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the public emergency services call centres.

• Under certain circumstances data is also transmitted in the voice channel to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

This allows measures for rescue, recovery or towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to be initiated quickly.

The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished.

It is not possible to immediately end an automatic emergency call.

If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre, the emergency call is automatically sent to the public emergency services call centre.

If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display.

Dial the emergency number 999 or 112 on your mobile phone.

If an emergency call has been initiated:

- Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre operator.

• Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
• If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately.

Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call

To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long ( page 282).
To use voice control: use the LINGUATRONIC voice commands.

The emergency call has been made:

• A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

• A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the public emergency services call centres.

• Under certain circumstances data is also transmitted in the voice channel to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre,
  This allows measures for rescue, recovery or towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to be initiated quickly.

• Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre operator.
• Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.

If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre, the emergency call is automatically sent to the public emergency services call centre.

If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the media display.

Dial the emergency number 999 or 112 on your mobile phone.

Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call

Using the multifunction steering wheel: select

Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

In the event of an automatic or manual emergency call the following data is transmitted, for example:

• Vehicle's GPS position data
• GPS position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)
- Direction of travel
• Vehicle identification number
- Vehicle drive type
• Number of people detected in the vehicle
- Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not
- Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically
• Time of the accident
• Language setting on the multimedia system

For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated;

• The current vehicle position can be determined.
• A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established.

For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving traffic information, cannot be performed for up to two hours after sending an emergency call.

Self diagnosis function of the emergency call system

Your car verifies the operability of the emergency call system each time the vehicle is ON. In case of system failure, you will be informed with text message on the instrument cluster and with red indicator SOS NOT READY on the display.

Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds after switching vehicle ON the red indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is

switched OFF, this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully.

Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode

Requirements:

• The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
• The vehicle is switched on.
- The vehicle has been stationary for at least one minute.

The test mode is currently available in the following countries, for example:

• Russia
• Belarus
• Kazakhstan
• Armenia
  • Kyrgyzstan

To start the test mode: press and hold the
button on the multifunction steering wheel for at least five seconds.
The test mode is started and automatically ends after the language test has been performed.
To stop manual test mode: switch off the vehicle.
The test mode is ended.

Radio, media & TV
Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu

Symbol Designation Function
	Play Select to start or continue playback.
	Rest Select to pause the playback.
	Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist.
	Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order.
	Skip forwards/back	Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.
	Options Select to show additional options.
	Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.).
	Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.
	Settings Select to make settings.
	Home Select to return to the home screen.
	Messaging Select to call up messaging.
	Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are available in the media menu:

- Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth ^® )

• Playing back audio or video files
• Streaming online music
• Looking at TV programmes in the TV menu

Additional functions in the TV menu

Symbol Designation Function
	Settings Select to make settings in the TV menu. The following functions can be switched on/off or configured:Channel fixCountry-specific character setAudio languageSubtitlesTeletextPicture format
1	EPG Select to show current programme information for the channel.
	Station list Select to show a list of available channels with the current programme.

Authorising a Bluetooth® audio device for media playback

Requirements:

• Bluetooth ^ is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment.
• The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP.
• The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices.

Multimedia system:

With Bluetooth ^® audio, you can play back music files from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system.

To play back audio files using the multimedia system, authorise the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system.

Authorising a new Bluetooth ^® audio device

▶ Select Connect new device.

Select an audio device.
Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment.
Select Only as Bluetooth audio device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system.

Connecting previously authorised Bluetooth® audio equipment

Select a Bluetooth ^® audio device from the list. The connection is being established.

Receiving TV channels in HD quality

NOTE Damage to the CI+ capable CA module (Conditional Access module) and the Smart Card due to sustained high heat

The Cl+ capable CA module is designed for home use. The Cl+ capable CA module can

overheat and be damaged at continuously high outside temperatures.

Make sure that the CI+ enabled CA module is not exposed to prolonged high temperatures. If the CI+ capable CA module is damaged, no encrypted channels can be received.

(i) The Cl+ module is not available in all countries.

A Cl+ module (CA module), which is not included in the scope of delivery, is used to decrypt HD programmes according to the Cl+ standard. In some countries, an additional smart card is required, which is inserted into the Cl+ module (see the manufacturer's operating manual).

The Cl+ module is connected in the Cl+ box in the glove compartment.

To insert the smart card in the Cl+ module: if required (country-dependent), insert the smart card into the Cl+ module slot.

The Cl+ box is designed for operating temperatures between 0 °C and 65 °C. At operating temperatures that are higher or too low a message appears in the multimedia system and the Cl+ module is switched off automatically. If the Cl+ module is switched off, no encrypted channels can be received.

Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu

Symbol Designation Function
	Home Select to return to the home screen.
	Messaging Select to call up messaging.
	Skip forwards/back	Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.
	Settings Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following additional functions, for example:Navigation and traffic announcementsFrequency fix functionRadio additional textEmergency warningsThe setting options are country-dependent.
	Full screen Select to switch to the DAB slide show.This function is not available in all countries.
	Silent function Select to switch off t he sound.
+	Store radio stations Select to save a station in the presets.
	Station list Select to have the station list shown.
	Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

Additional functions of Tuneln radio

i A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using Tuneln radio.

Symbol Designation Function
	Settings The following additional settings are available in the Tuneln radio menu:Selecting streamLogging on to or out of the Tuneln account
	Favourites Select during playback to save the station currently set as a favourite.
	Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback.
	Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station.

Depending on the frequency band selected, different functions are available to you.

Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.

Calling up TuneIn Radio

Requirements

• À Mercedes me account is available.

• The vehicle is connected with the Mercedes me account.
• The Tuneln Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
  • The data volume is available.

Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.

• A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference.
  ① Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.
  The functions and services are country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Radio

Select Tuneln Radio. The Tuneln menu appears. The last station set starts playing.
① The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.

Sound settings

Overview of functions in the sound menu

The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system fitted. You can find

out which sound system is fitted in your vehicle in the Digital Owner's Manual.

Standard sound system and Advanced sound system

The following functions are available:

• Equaliser
• Treble, mid-range and bass
  • Balance and fader
  • Volume
• Automatic adjustment

Burmester ^® surround sound system and Burmester ^® high-end 3D surround sound system

The following functions are available:

• Equaliser
- Treble, mid-range and bass
• Balance and fader
- Sound focus
- VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system only)
- Sound profiles

• Volume - Automatic adjustment

ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument display informs you of the time or distance remaining before the next service due date.

You can hide this service display using the back button ↩ on the steering wheel.

Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases:

• Mainly short-distance driving
- When the engine is often left idling for long periods
• In the event of frequent cold start phases
- Vehicles with a diesel particulate filter: in the event of frequently interrupted regeneration of the diesel particulate filter

Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions.

You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Displaying the service due date

On-board computer:

Service ▶ ASSYST PLUS

The next service due date is displayed.

To exit the display: press the back button on the steering wheel.

Bear in mind the following related topic:

- Operating the on-board computer (→ page 251).

Information on regular maintenance work

NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates

Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.

Adhere to the prescribed service intervals.
▶ Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Have the maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed if operating conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. It is the responsibility of the driver of the vehicle to have maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed due to actual operating conditions and/or stresses.

Examples of arduous operating conditions:

• Regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
  • Mainly short-distance driving

• Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces

• When the engine is often left idling for long periods
  • Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used

In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. Check the tyres more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased stress. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected.

▶ Display and note down the service due date on the instrument display before disconnecting the battery ( page 303).

Maintenance Management

Notes about Maintenance Management

If the Maintenance Management service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre. The customer centre transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://www.mercedes.me. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle.

The calculation of the optimal transmission time of the maintenance request to the service partner is subject to technical limitations that may cause the maintenance recommendation to be perceived as too early or too late or not to be made at all. In this case, you can conveniently arrange a maintenance appointment with the customer centre via the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system.
i Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country. Contact a

Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether this function is available in your country.

Data transferred when using Maintenance Management

When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and fault rectification.

Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use".

① Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country.

Telediagnostics

Notes about Telediagnostics

This service is not available in all countries.

The vehicle can detect if certain wear parts need to be replaced or if malfunctions have occurred in vehicle systems. If the Telediagnostics service is activated, relevant data is automatically transmitted to the manufacturer. If fault conditions are detected by the vehicle system self-diagnosis, the system transmits recommendations for action to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre depending on the fault detected. The customer centre transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://www.mercedes.me.

For selected faults, the notification that a malfunction has been detected may appear in the multimedia system with a request to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. From this message, a call can be made directly to the customer centre for assistance.

The transmission of a notification to the multimedia system depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment and requires a fast data connection, over which the service provider has no influence.
① Reliable fault detection is subject to technical limitations. Therefore, only a limited selection

of faults can be detected and recommendations for action transmitted to the customer centre and the service partners. Mercedes-Benz AG is continuously working on the expansion of this service. The fault detection depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment.

Data transferred when using Telediagnostics

When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and fault rectification.

Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use".

The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model and equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times.

Engine compartment

Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)

Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian protection)

In certain accident situations, the actuation of the active bonnet reduces the risk of injury to pedestrians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by approximately 80 mm.

After being triggered, the active bonnet remains in the raised position. Limited visibility due to the raised bonnet cannot be ruled out.

After the active bonnet has been actuated, pedestrian protection may be limited.

Have the full functionality of the active bonnet restored immediately in a qualified specialist workshop.

If necessary, adjust your seat position and drive carefully to a qualified specialist workshop. If a safe continued journey is not possible, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Opening and closing the bonnet

WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked

The bonnet may open and block your view.

▶ Never release the bonnet when driving.
Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet

The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position.

There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of movement.

Do not open or close the bonnet if there is a person in the bonnet's range of movement.

WARNING Risk of bums when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
- You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.

Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
Remove jewellery and watches.
Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage

The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate at high voltage. You could receive an electric shock.

▶ Never touch ignition system or fuel injection system components when the vehicle is switched on.

The live components include the following, for example:

• Ignition coils
• Fuel injectors

• Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors

WARNING Risk of bums from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open

If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle first if you need to open the bonnet.

Opening the bonnet

To release the bonnet, pull on handle ①.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Push handle ② of the bonnet catch upwards and lift the bonnet until it opens automatically.

Closing the bonnet

Lower the bonnet to a height of around 20 cm and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go.

If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, open the bonnet again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly.

Engine oil

- Checking the engine oil level using the on-board computer

Requirements:

• The engine has been warmed up.
• The vehicle is parked on a level surface.
• The engine is running at idle speed.
• The bonnet is closed.

The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style.

On-board computer:

Service ➤ Engine oil level

One of the following messages will appear on the instrument display:

• Engine oil level Measuring now: measurement of the oil level is not yet possible.
Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.
- Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is green and is between "min" and "max"; the oil level is correct.
- Engine oil level Add 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is orange and is below "min":
▶ Add 1 l of engine oil.
- Reduce engine oil level and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is orange and is above "max":

Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
• For engine oil level turn on ignition
Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level.
• Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
• Engine oil level System currently unavail.
Close the bonnet.

Topping up engine oil

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil

If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite.

Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening.
Allow the engine to cool off and thoroughly clean the engine oil from component parts before starting the vehicle.

NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives

Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifications explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
▶ Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.
Do not use additives.

! NOTE Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter.

Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may also be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.

▶ Turn cap ⓘ anti-clockwise and remove it.
Top up the engine oil.
Replace cap ① and turn it clockwise until it engages.
▶ Check the oil level again ( page 308).

Checking the coolant level

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

⚠ WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant

If you open the cap, you could be scalded.

Let the motor cool down before opening the cap.
When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses.
▶ Open the cap slowly to release pressure.

Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Check the coolant temperature display on the instrument display. The coolant temperature must be below 70^ C.
Slowly turn cap ① anti-clockwise to release overpressure.
Continue turning cap ① anti-clockwise and remove it.

The coolant level is correct in the following cases:

• If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to marker bar ②.
• If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to 1.5 cm over the marker bar ②.

If necessary, refill with coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz.

i Further information on coolant (→ page 369).

Topping up the windscreen washer system

WARNING Risk of bums from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

Remove cap ① by the tab.
Top up the washer fluid.
i Further information about the windscreen washer fluid ( page 370)

Keeping the air/water duct free

Keep the area between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow or leaves.

Cleaning and care

Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash

A WARNING Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing the vehicle

Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.

After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations:

• Active Brake Assist
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- HOLD function
• Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations:

During towing.
In a car wash.

NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash

Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.

▶ Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
▶ Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
• The HOLD function is switched off.
- The 360° camera or the reversing camera is switched off.
- The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.
• The outside mirrors are folded in.
- The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off.
- The windscreen wiper switch is in position 0.
- The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the boot lid could open unintentionally.

• For car washes with a conveyor system:

- Neutral N is engaged.

If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the key is located in the vehicle. Park position P will otherwise be engaged automatically.

If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

Information on using a high-pressure cleaner

WARNING Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with round-spray nozzles

The water jet can cause externally invisible damage.

Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail.

Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with round-spray nozzles.

Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the following when using a high-pressure cleaner:

• The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the boot lid could open unintentionally.
• Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle.
• Vehicles with decorative films: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative film. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the film-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C.
• Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.
• Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tyres,

gaps, electrical components, batteries, illuminants or louvres.

Washing the vehicle by hand

NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress

Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the bonnet.

Observe the relevant legal requirements (e.g. in some countries, washing by hand is permitted only in specially designated wash bays).

▶ Use a mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo).
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois.

i Observe the notes on the care of car parts ( page 315).

Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care

To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes:

Paint

• Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
• Bird droppings: Soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
• Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
• Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water.
  • Tar stains: use tar remover.
• Wax: use silicone remover.
• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
• Remove dirt immediately, where possible.

Matt finish

• Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
• Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.
• Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards.
• Do not use car wash programmes with a final hot wax treatment.
• Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.

In the event of paintwork damage:

• Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
• Make sure the radar sensors function ( page 182).

Notes on cleaning decorative films

Observe the "Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care" ( page 313). They also apply to matt decorative films.

Observe the notes on cleaning decorative films to avoid damage.

Cleaning

• For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances (e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz).
• Remove dirt as soon as possible. Avoid rubbing too hard in order not to damage the decorative film irreparably.
• If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative film is dull: use the paint cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
• Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
• Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.

- To prevent water stains, dry a film-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.

Avoiding damage to the decorative film

• The service life and colouring of decorative films are impaired by:
• Sunlight
• Temperature (e.g. hot air blower)
  Weather conditions
• Stone chippings and dirt
  Chemical cleaning agents

• Oily products

• Do not use polish on matt decorative film. Polishing will have the effect of shining the film-wrapped surface.

• Do not treat matt or structured decorative films with wax. Permanent stains may occur.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In this case, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

You can obtain more information on care and cleaning agents from the manufacturer. In the case of film-wrapped surfaces, visual differences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative film after a decorative film has been removed.

i Have work or repairs to decorative films carried out at a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre).

Notes on care of car parts

WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while the windscreen is being cleaned

If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following car parts:

Wheels and rims

• Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
- Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
- To avoid corrosion of the brake disks and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake disks and brakepads will warm up and dry out.

Windows

NOTE Damage to electronic components due to excess fluids

When cleaning the windows from the inside, fluids such as cleaning agents or water may run down and get behind trim parts of the vehicle interior and cause damage to electronic components.

Use cleaning agents as sparingly as possible.

Immediately absorb any excess fluids.

• Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the insides of windows.
  After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windscreen thoroughly with cleaning agents recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or dazzling spots.
  i Remove external fogging or dirt on the windscreen in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or unavailable ( page 182).

Wiper blades

- Move the wiper arms into the replacement position (→ page 136).

• With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.
  Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating may leave residue on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too often.

Exterior lighting

• Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo).
• Use only cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.

Sensors

• Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo ( page 182).
• When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum distance of 30 cm.

Reversing camera and 360° camera

• Open the camera cover with the multimedia system ( page 227).
• Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens.

- Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.

Trailer hitch

• Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufacturer's operator manual.
• Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or solvent.
• Remove traces of rust on the ball (e.g. using a wire brush).
• Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
  • After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball head.

Before using trailers with anti-torsional coupling, observe the manufacturer's operator manual.

Notes on care of the interior

WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of solvent-based care products

Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away.

Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts

Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them.

This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident.

▶ Never bleach or dye seat belts.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and care:

Seat belts

• Clean with lukewarm soapy water.
• Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
• Do not dry by heating them to over 80^ C or exposing them to direct sunlight.

Display

• Switch off the display and let it cool down.
• Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD).
• Do not use any other agents.

Head-up display

- Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth.

- Do not use cleaning agents.

Plastic trim

• Clean with a damp microfibre cloth.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.

- Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come into contact with the plastic trim.

Real wood and trim elements

• Clean with a microfibre cloth.
• Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.

Roof lining

- Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

Carpet

- Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.

Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINA-MICA

NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners

Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel

cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish.

• Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
  • Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.

Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change.

Genuine leather seat covers

• Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then clean the seat covers with a damp cotton

cloth and wipe down with a dry cloth. Regularly clean the seat covers.

• For heavy soiling: use a leather care agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz aftercare.
  • Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.
• Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
• Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change.

Waves or wrinkling in the seat cover may occur due to the stress on the seat; this is caused by the natural leather material. Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and ageing damage and thus significantly extends its life

span. Clothing that can leave stains (e.g. jeans) may discolour the leather.

DINAMICA seat covers

• Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cloth to clean.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.

Imitation leather seat covers

• Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot clean.
• Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.
• Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

Fabric seat covers

- Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp microfibre cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot clean.

• Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

Emergency

Removing the safety vest

The safety vests are located in the stowage compartments in the driver's and front passenger door.

▶ Pull out the safety vest bag by the loop. ▶ Open the safety vest bag and pull out the safety vest.
There are also safety vest compartments in the rear door stowage compartments in which safety vests can be stored.

① Maximum number of washes
2 Maximum wash temperature

Do not bleach
Do not iron
Do not tumble dry
6 Do not dry clean
⑦ Class 2 safety vest

The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed.

Replace the safety vest in the following cases:

• The reflective strips are damaged or dirty
- The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded
- The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to sunlight.

Dispose of the safety vest in an environmentally friendly manner:

- Please contact your local waste disposal company.

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

Push both sides of warning triangle holder in the direction of the arrow and open it.
Remove warning triangle 2.

Setting up the warning triangle

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Fold side reflectors ① upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top using upper press-stud ②.
Fold legs ③ down and out to the side.

First-aid kit (soft sided) overview

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

The first aid bag ⓘ is located on the left or right side of the boot, depending on the vehicle version.

On vehicles with Burmester® Surround Sound System, the first-aid bag is located in the boot when the vehicle is delivered.

Removing the fire extinguisher

WARNING Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in the driver's footwell

A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other vehicle occupants.

Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket.
Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving.

Left-hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 upwards.
Right-hand drive vehicle: pull tab ① downwards.
Remove fire extinguisher ②.

Flat tyre

Notes on flat tyres

WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tyre

A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle.

Tyres without run-flat characteristics:

Do not drive with a flat tyre.
Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyres with run-flat characteristics:

Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres).

In the event of a flat tyre, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment:

• Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) (→ page 321).

• Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit ( page 323).

• Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown ( page 282).
  • All vehicles: change the wheel ( page 350).

Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)

WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode

Driving in emergency mode impairs the handling characteristics of the vehicle.

Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed of the MOExtended tyres.
Avoid any abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres as well as driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.
▶ Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice:
- banging noise

• vehicle vibration
  • smoke which smells like rubber
  • continuous ESP ^® intervention
  • cracks in the tyre sidewalls
  After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use.
  The defective tyre must be replaced in every case.

With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. However, the tyre affected must not show any clearly visible damage.

You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tyre.

Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning system: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system.

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure monitoring system.

If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows:

• Check the tyre for damage.
  • If driving on, observe the following notes.

Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:

Load condition Driving distance possible in emergency mode
Partially laden 80 km
Fully laden 30 km

The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h. If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a standard tyre as a temporary measure.

TREFIT kit storage location

The TREFIT kit is located under the boot floor.

① Tyre sealant bottle
② Tyre inflation compressor

Depending on the vehicle version, the TREFIT kit may be located in other positions under the boot floor.

You can find information on the power category (LK) and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre inflation compressor:

• LK2 - 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg

At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre inflation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply:

• Emissions sound pressure level L_PA 83 dB (A)
  • Sound power level L_WA 91 dB (A)

The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Using the TREFIT kit

Requirements:

• Tyre sealant bottle and tyre inflator compressor are ready for use ( page 322).
• TREFIT sticker is present.
• Gloves are present.

You can use TREFIT tyre sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TREFIT in outside temperatures down to -20 °C.

WARNING Risk of accident when using tyre sealant

The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in the following cases:

• there are large cuts or punctures in the tyre (larger than damage previously mentioned)
  • the wheel rims have been damaged
  • after journeys with very low tyre pressure or with flat tyres
  Do not continue driving.
  Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant

Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from children.

Observe the following if you come into contact with the tyre sealant:

Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin using water immediately.
If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse them using clean water immediately.
If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your mouth immediately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.
Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant immediately.
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTE Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long

Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a qualified specialist workshop every five years.

Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tyre.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Affix part ① of the TREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
Affix part ② of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.

Pull plug ④ with the cable and hose ⑤ out of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
Push the plug of hose ⑤ into flange ⑥ of tyre sealant bottle ① until the plug engages.
Place tyre sealant bottle ① head downwards into recess ② of the tyre inflation compressor.

Remove the valve cap from valve ⑦ on the faulty tyre.
Screw filling hose ⑧ onto valve ⑦.
Insert plug ④ into a 12-V-socket in your vehicle.
Switch on the vehicle.
Switch on the tyre inflation compressor using On/Off switch ③. The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase!

Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clean water.

If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene.

If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained:

▶ Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.

Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.

Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose.

Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 10 m.

Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained

If the specified tyre pressure is not attained after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.

The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:

▶ Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.

WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres

A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds.

Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.
Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant.

Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant.

NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant

After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose.

Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TREFIT kit.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal

Tyre sealant contains pollutants.

Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre inflation compressor.
▶ Pull away immediately.
Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure using the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained

If the specified tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.

The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: you will find a sticker with the telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap for values.
To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor.

To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure release button ① next to manometer ②.
When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre.
Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre.
Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor.
The filling hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle.
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.

Battery (vehicle)

Notes on the 12 V battery

WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This

can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• when braking
• in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
  In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
  Do not drive on.
  Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

• Further information on ABS ( page 184)
• Further information on ESP®(→ page 184)

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery

WARNING Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery.

To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery.

The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.

WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid

Battery acid is caustic.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not lean over the battery.
Do not inhale battery gases.
▶ Keep children away from the battery.

Immediately rinse battery acid off thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.

All vehicles

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion if the 12 V battery is used improperly.

Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor immediately.

Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the battery to support a person in any way.

Wear safety glasses.

Keep children away.

Observe this Owner's Manual.

Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time:

• Non-plug-in hybrid: switch to standby mode (→ page 181).
• Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery.

Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

All vehicles

When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.

NOTE Damage to the battery due to over-voltage

When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged.

▶ Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

WARNING Risk of explosion due to the ignition of hydrogen gas

If there is a short circuit or sparks are created, there is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when you charge the battery.

Make sure that the POSITIVE terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
▶ Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always observe the sequence of battery terminals described.

During starting assistance, always take care to connect only battery terminals of identical polarity.
During starting assistance, observe the sequence described for connecting and disconnecting the jump leads.
Do not connect or disconnect the battery terminals with the engine running.

WARNING Risk of explosion due to explosive mixture of gases

An explosive mixture of gases can escape from the battery during charging and starting assistance.

▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
Make sure there is adequate ventilation.
Do not stand over the battery.

WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen battery

A discharged battery may freeze at temperatures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be released.

▶ Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assistance.

If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.

The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures.

It is recommended that you have a thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

All vehicles

NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine

Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel.

Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine.

Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery:

• Only use undamaged jump lead/charging cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
• Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump lead/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connection point.
• The jump lead/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running.

• Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged.
- Keep away from fire and naked flames.
- Do not lean over the battery.

Observe the additional following points when charging the battery:

• Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
• Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.

Observe the additional following points during starting assistance:

• Starting assistance may only be provided using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
  • The vehicles must not touch.
• Vehicles with a petrol engine: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Requirements:

• The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
• Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position P.
• The vehicle and all electrical consumers are switched off.
  • The bonnet is open.

Example: engine compartment

Slide cover ① of POSITIVE contact ② on the jump-starting connection point in the direction of the arrow.
Connect POSITIVE contact ② on your vehicle to the positive terminal of the donor battery using the jump lead/charging cable. Always

begin with POSITIVE contact ② on your own vehicle first.

During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.
Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery and earth point ③ of your own vehicle by using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first.
During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.
During the charging process: start the charging process.
During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.
During starting assistance: before disconnecting the jump lead, switch on an electrical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.

When the starting assistance/charging process is complete, perform the following steps:

First, remove the jump lead/charging cable from earth point ③ and the negative terminal

of the donor battery, then POSITIVE contact and the positive terminal of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first.
After removing the jump lead/charging cable, close cover ① of POSITIVE contact ②.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Replacing the 12 V battery

Observe the notes on the 12 V battery ( page 326).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself:

- Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific vehicle requirements.

The vehicle is equipped with an AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) technology battery or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lithium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

• Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced.
• Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening on the side of the battery.

Fit any existing or supplied cell caps.

Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.

- Make sure that detachable parts are reconnected in the same way.

Tow-starting or towing away

Permitted towing methods

NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations:

• Active Brake Assist
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- HOLD function
• Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations:

During towing.
In a car wash.

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away.

For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow rod. Do not use tow bar systems.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly

Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

Vehicles with rear wheel drive

Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the ground	Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h
Front axle raised	No
Rear axle raised	Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the centre position with a steering wheel lock

4MATIC vehicles

Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the ground	Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h
Front axle raised	No
Rear axle raised	No

Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods.
Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.

Observe the following points when the battery is discharged:

• the vehicle cannot be started.

• the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied
• Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission cannot be shifted to position N or P.

Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the transmission cannot be shifted to position N or if the display does not show anything, transport the vehicle ( page 334). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transportation.

NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances

The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances.

A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded.
A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.

WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur:

• the towing eye may become detached.
- the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn.

Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass.

If a vehicle has to be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.

Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 360).
▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not open the driver's door or front passenger

door; the transmission otherwise automatically shifts to position P.

Fit the towing eye ( page 335).
Fasten the towing device.

NOTE Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar

Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

▶ Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism.
Do not activate the HOLD function.
Deactivate tow-away protection ( page 96).
▶ Deactivate Active Brake Assist ( page 208).
▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift to position N.
Release the electric parking brake.

A WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process

Safety-related functions are limited or no longer available in the following situations:

• the vehicle is switched off.
- the brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning.
- the energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.

When your vehicle is towed away, significantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required.

▶ Use a tow bar.
Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away.

NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power

If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged.

▶ Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Loading the vehicle for transport

Observe the notes on towing away ( page 332).
Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.
i You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position N.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission may be locked in position P in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shift to N, provide the on-

board electrical system with power ( page 330).

Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P.
Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
▶ Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS)

A WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS

When transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid.

Load the vehicle correctly onto the transporter.
▶ Secure the vehicle on all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps.

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 60 km/h when transporting.
! NOTE Damage to the vehicle from securing it incorrectly
After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards and 10 cm downwards must be kept to the transport platform.
Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading.

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission

Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle

Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehicle.

Towing eye storage location

Towing eye is located under the boot floor.

(i) Depending on the vehicle version, the towing eye is in a different position in the boot.

Fitting and removing the towing eye

Press the mark on cover ① inwards and remove.
Depending on the vehicle version, it is necessary to take an additional step to unlock this by pressing on the side of the release clips. The cover beneath it can then be pulled forward and removed at the recess.
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.

Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

After removing the towing eye, ① engage the cover in the bumper.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye

When recovering the vehicle by towing it out using the towing eye, the vehicle may be damaged.

Only use the towing eye for towing or unhooking the vehicle.

Do not use the towing eye for towing out during recovery.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch

When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process.

Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow start the vehicle.
Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery.

Tow-starting the vehicle

Vehicles with automatic transmission

! NOTE Damage to the automatic transmission due to tow-starting

The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow-starting vehicles with automatic transmission.

▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

▶ Vehicles with an automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

Electrical fuses

Notes on electrical fuses

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded.

This could result in a fire.

Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses containing the correct amperage.

NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or systems or their functions being considerably restricted.

Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respective specified fuse rating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and the label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram.

Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the boot ( page 339).

NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture

Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.

When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.

When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.

Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
• All electrical consumers are switched off.
• The vehicle is switched off.

The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

• Fuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side (→ page 337)
• Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (→ page 338)
• Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (→ page 339)
• Fuse box in the boot on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel ( page 339)

Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment

Requirements

• A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.

Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 336).

Opening

WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open

If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle first if you need to open the bonnet.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

Open the bonnet ( page 306).
Turn clips ② on cover ① a quarter-turn to anti-clockwise.
Pull cover ① up.

Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
Loosen screws ④ and remove fuse box lid ③ from the top.

Closing

Check whether the seal is positioned correctly in lid ③.

Insert lid ③ into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box.
Fold down lid ③ of the fuse box and tighten screws ④.
Insert cover ① on both sides.
Turn clips ② on cover ① a quarter-turn clockwise.
Close the bonnet.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit

- Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 336).

The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover.

Mercedes-Benz recommends you have the fuse box opened at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell

Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 336).

Opening and closing the fuse box in the boot

Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 336).

Fold cover ① down in the direction of the arrow.

The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.

To open: open cover ① in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
To close: reinsert cover ①.

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics

Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics.

If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged tyres

Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.

▶ Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.

WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread

Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip.

The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehicle is not adapted to suit the conditions.

Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.

Minimum tread depth for:

• Summer tyres: 3 mm
- M+S tyres: 4 mm
For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off-road:

- Check the tyre pressure (→ page 341).

• Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
- Check the valve caps.
- Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.

Notes on snow chains

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrectly fitted snow chains

If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components.

▶ Never fit snow chains to the front wheels.
Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs.

! NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to fitted snow chains

If you fit snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage components of the vehicle body or chassis.

Only fit snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.

Observe the following notes when using snow chains:

• Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
• For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard.
• Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer.

• If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.

• Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted.

• Vehicles with level control: if snow chains are fitted, only drive at raised vehicle level (→ page 219).
  ① You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres ( page 193).
  ① You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (→ page 186). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Tyre pressure

Notes on tyre pressure

WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient or excessive tyre pressure

Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose in particular the following risks:

• The tyres can burst.

• The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
• The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
  Comply with the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all tyres, including the spare wheel, regularly:
• monthly
• when the load changes
  • before embarking on a longer journey
• if operating conditions change, e.g. off-road driving
  Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary.

Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can:

• Shorten the service life of the tyres.
• Cause increased tyre damage.
• Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.

WARNING Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tyres

The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged. Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres bursting.

▶ Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
▶ Check whether the tyre has a puncture or the valve has a leak.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap ( page 342).

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure.

Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Conditions for cold tyres:

- The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.

• The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.

The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres increases, so too does the tyre pressure.

Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: you can also check the tyre pressure using the on-board computer ( page 343).

Notes on trailer operation

Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recommended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table for increased load.

Tyre pressure table

The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehicle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for cold tyres under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle.

If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for those tyre sizes and their respective load condition.

If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the symbol, the tyre pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel consumption may then increase slightly.

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Function of the tyre pressure monitoring system

The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature of the tyres fitted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor.

The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature appear in the on-board computer ( page 343).

If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages ( page 423) or the warning lamp in the instrument cluster ( page 446).

The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation.

In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring system will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system manually ( page 344).

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• incorrect reference values were taught in
• sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for example
• there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source

- Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system

Requirements:

• The vehicle is switched on.

On-board computer:

Service ▶ Tyres

One of the following displays appears:

- Current tyre pressure and tyre temperature of the individual wheels:

- Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving

- Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tyre pressures are already being monitored.

Compare the tyre pressure with the recommended tyre pressure for the current operating condition ( page 342). Additionally,

observe the notes on cold tyres ( page 341).

The values displayed in the on-board computer may deviate from those of the tyre pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressure.

Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system

Requirements:

- The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels ( page 341).

Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the following situations:

• The tyre pressure has changed.
- The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted.

On-board computer:

Service ▶ Tyres

Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use current pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the Instrument Display.

To restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message is shown in the Instrument Display.

Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow ⏻ warning lamp goes out.

After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The current tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic:

• Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 341)

Tyre pressure loss warning system

■ Function of the tyre pressure loss warning system

The tyre pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tyre pressure loss.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• incorrect reference values were taught in
• sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for example
• an even pressure loss on more than one tyre occurs

The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations:

• poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel
- driving with snow chains
- when adopting a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden acceleration
• driving with a very heavy or large trailer

- driving with a high load

The tyre pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation and to check it.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 341)
• Display messages about the tyres ( page 423)

■ Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system

Requirements:

- The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on all wheels.

Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in the following situations:

• The tyre pressure has changed.
- The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted.

On-board computer:

Service ▶ Tyres

Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart message is shown in the display.
To begin restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre pressure now OK? message is shown in the display.
Select Yes
To confirm restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message is shown in the display.
After you have driven for a few minutes, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressures of all the tyres.

Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic:

• Notes on tyre pressure ( page 341)

Wheel change

Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions

If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are fitted, the service brakes or components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged.

Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part.

For wheels, pay attention to the following:

• Designation
• Type

For tyres, pay attention to the following:

• Designation
• Manufacturer
• Type

A WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause the tyres to explode.

Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model.
Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage caused by non-approved tyre types and sizes

For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.

These tyres are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows:

• MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
• MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tyres only for certain wheels)
- MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres)

Otherwise, certain properties, such as handling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tyre or the vehicle.

Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea- ded tyres

Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres.

For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed.

Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage.

NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when driving over obstacles

Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tyres being damaged when driving over obstacles increases.

Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully.
▶ Reduce your speed when driving over kerbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes.
▶ Avoid particularly high kerbs.

NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in potholes

Parking on kerbs or in potholes can damage the wheels and tyres.

▶ Only park on level surfaces if possible.

▶ Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking.

NOTE Damage to electronic component parts due to the use of tyre-fitting tools

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: there are electronic component parts in the wheel.

If tyre-fitting tools are positioned in the area of the valve, the electronic components could be damaged.

▶ Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve.
Always have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

! NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures

At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tyres, causing permanent damage to the tyre.

At temperatures below 7 °C use M+S tyres.

Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about:

• Suitability
• Legal stipulations
  • Factory recommendations

WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tyres

The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased.

In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tyre running temperature.

Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly.
Use M+S tyres at outside temperatures of less than 10 °C.
Only use the tyres for their intended purpose.

Observe the following when selecting, fitting and replacing tyres:

- Country-specific requirements for tyre approval that define a specific tyre type for your vehicle.

• Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial.
- Only use tyres and wheels of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) and the same make.
- Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right).
It is only permissible to fit a different wheel size in the event of a flat tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop.
- Do not make any modifications to the brake system, the wheels or the tyres.
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.
- Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system.
- At temperatures below 7 °C use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked ⚠ M+S for all wheels.

Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.

• For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread.
• Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres fitted.
  If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision.
• Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km.
• Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
• When replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TREFIT kit after replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres.

You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres (→ page 193).

For more information on wheels and tyres, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 341)
• Tyre pressure table ( page 342)
- Notes on the emergency spare wheel (→ page 355)

Notes on interchanging wheels

WARNING Risk of injury through different wheel sizes

Interchanging the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The disk brakes or wheel suspension components may also be damaged.

Only interchange the front and rear wheels if the wheels and tyres have the same dimensions.

Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid.

Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" ( page 345)

The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ:

• front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder
- rear wheels wear more in the centre of the tyre

Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning).

On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels.

Notes on storing wheels

When storing wheels, observe the following notes:

• After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.
- Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel.

Overview of the tyre-change tool kit

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out which wheel change tools are necessary and approved for changing the wheel on your vehicle. You require the following tools, forexample, to change a wheel:

• Jack

• Chock

• Wheel wrench

• Centring pin

The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the sticker affixed to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

The tyre-change tool kit is located under the boot floor.

Depending on the model, the tyre change tool kit may be located at other positions under the boot floor.

Jack
② Wheel wrench
3 Centring pin
4 Folding chock
5 Ratchet for jack

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements

• The vehicle is not on a slope.
- The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
• The required tyre-change tool kit is available.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools.

Apply the electric parking brake manually.
Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.
Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Vehicles with level control system: set the normal vehicle level ( page 219).
▶ Switch off the vehicle.
Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.
Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps ( page 350).
▶ Raise the vehicle ( page 351).

Removing and fitting the wheel trim/hub caps

Requirements

- The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (→ page 350).

Plastic hub cap

To remove:

Turn the centre cover of the hub cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap.

To fit:

Make sure that the centre cover of the hub cap is turned anti-clockwise.

Position the hub cap and turn the centre cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly.

Aluminium hub cap

To remove:

Position socket ② from the tyre-change tool kit on hub cap ①.
▶ Position wheel spanner ③ on socket ②.
Using wheel spanner ③, turn hub cap ① anti-clockwise and remove it.

To fit:

▶ Follow the instructions above in reverse order.

i Specified tightening torque: 25 Nm.

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements:

• There are no persons in the vehicle.
- The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change ( page 350).
- The wheel trims and hub caps have been removed ( page 350).

Important notes on using the jack:

- Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle.

• The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle.
• The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
• The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point.

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:

• Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle.
• Never lie under the vehicle.
• Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake.
• Do not open or close any doors or the boot lid.

Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely.

Position of the jack support points

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.

▶ Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of

the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to the jack

If you do not position the jack at the jack support points provided for this purpose, you could damage your vehicle.

Only position the jack at the jack support points provided for this purpose.

Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

Removing a wheel

Requirements:

• The vehicle is raised ( page 351).

! NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel

Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repositioning the wheel.

Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when removing and repositioning.

NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts

Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.

Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.

Screw centring pin ① into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely.
Remove the wheel.

Fitting a new wheel

Requirements

- The wheel to be changed is removed and the centring pin is screwed in (→ page 353).

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel

Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the wheel bolts to come loose, as too can damaged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.

▶ Never oil or grease the threads.
In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads replaced.
Do not continue driving.

Observe the information on the choice of tyres ( page 345).

For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when fitting.

NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel

Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repositioning the wheel.

Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when removing and repositioning.

Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cent-ring pin and push it on.

WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.

Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" ( page 345).
For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.
Unscrew and remove the centring pin.
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.
▶ Lower the vehicle (→ page 354).

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change

Requirements

• The new wheel has been fitted ( page 354).
To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise.

Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated ① to ⑤ with an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated ① to ⑤ with the specified tightening torque of 150 Nm.

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque

The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque.

▶ Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.
If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening torque checked immediately.
Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.
▶ Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warning system: restart the tyre pressure loss warning system ( page 345).
▶ Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 344).

Emergency spare wheel

Notes on the emergency spare wheel

WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions

The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle.

To prevent hazardous situations:

Drive carefully.
▶ Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.
Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly.
Do not deactivate ESP ^® .
Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work-

shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.

The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the boot.

Observe the following notes on fitting an emergency spare wheel:

• The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h.
• Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow chains.
• Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
• Use the wheel bolts that are included with the emergency spare wheel.
• Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary.

The specified tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.
Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warning system: if an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot

function reliably. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 341)
• Tyre pressure table ( page 342)
• Notes on fitting tyres (→ page 345)
- Fitting an emergency spare wheel (→ page 350)

Notes on technical data

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Only for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are supplied when the vehicle is delivered.

On-board electronics

Notes on tampering with the engine electronics

NOTE Premature wear through improper maintenance

Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated.

Always have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Two-way radios

Notes on fitting two-way radios

WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios

If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios

If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particular:

• The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial.
• The exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection aerial.

This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.

NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use

The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed.

▶ Only use approved frequency bands.
Observe the maximum permissible output power in these frequency bands.
▶ Only use approved aerial positions.

1 Front roof area
② Rear roof area
3 Rear wings
4 Boot lid

On the rear wings, it is recommended that you fit the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road.

Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles - "EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts.

If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when fitting.

Two-way radio transmission output

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the values in the following table.

Frequency band and maximum transmission output

Frequency band Maximum transmission output
Short wave3 - 54 MHz	100 W
4-m- frequency band74 - 88 MHz	30 W
2-m- frequency band 144 - 174 MHz	50 W
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz	10 W
70-cm- frequency band 420 - 450 MHz	35 W
Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G)	10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions:

• two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW
• RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA)

• mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)

There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands:

• Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)
- 70-cm-frequency band
- 2G/3G/4G

Regulatory radio identification and notes

Regulatory radio identification of small components

Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identification" in the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.

Regulatory radio identification – Indonesia and Israel

Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components for Indonesia and Israel can be

found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identification – Indonesia and Israel" in the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.

These are not small components. Information about small components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identification of small components".

Information on installation clearances

Information on installation clearances of wireless vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Installation clearances" in the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Further component-specific information

Further component-specific information can be found using the key phrase "further component-specific information" in the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview

Vehicle identification plate

Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait)

① Vehicle manufacturer
2 Place of manufacture
③ Manufacturing date
④ Vehicle model
5 VIN

Vehicle identification plate (example: all other countries)

① Vehicle manufacturer
② EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries)
VIN (vehicle identification number)
4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg)

Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle combination (kg) (only for specific countries)
6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
8 Paint code
① The data shown in the illustration is example data.

VIN below the front right-hand seat

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

① Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number)
② Floor covering

VIN at the lower edge of the windscreen

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

VIN (vehicle identification number) as label

The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind-screen is only available in some countries.

Engine number

The engine number is stamped into the crank-case. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Operating fluids

Notes on operating fluids

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

WARNING Risk of injury due to harmful operating fluids

Operating fluids can be toxic.

When using, storing and disposing of operating fluids, observe the imprints on the respective original containers.
Always keep operating fluids in the sealed original container.
Always keep children away from operating fluids.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating fluids

Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environment.

▶ Dispose of operating fluids in an environmentally responsible manner.

Operating fluids include the following:

• fuels
• DeNOx agent AdBlue® for exhaust gas after-treatment
• lubricants
• Coolant
• Brake fluid
  • windscreen washer fluid
  • climate control system refrigerant

Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.

The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container:

• MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
• MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Further information on approved operating fluids:

• in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation
• At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com
  • At a qualified specialist workshop

WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
Before and during refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if fitted, the stationary heater.

WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale fuel vapour.
Keep children away from fuel.
Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.

Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refuelled with the following fuel types:

• unleaded petrol
  • E85 fuel
  • a mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded petrol

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identified by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ from the information in the Owner's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Fuel

Information on fuel quality for vehicles with a petrol engine

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 362).

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification.

Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

See the information label in fuel filler flap for other compatible fuels.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Diesel
• Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
• Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
  • Petrol with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The following compatibility indications for fuel apply to your vehicle:

① For petrol with a maximum of 5% ethanol by volume
② For petrol with a maximum of 10% ethanol by volume

According to European standard EN 16942, you can find the compatibility indications in the following locations:

• On the vehicle, on the information label on the fuel filler flap (→ page 171)
• On the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe

If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulphur, it may produce unpleasant odours.

The recommended octane number for your vehicle can also be found on the information label on the fuel filler flap ( page 171).

① Vehicles with M256 petrol engine: if you are using 95 RON, there may be slight limitations in performance that have no further consequences.

Refuel only with super unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 98 RON if you wish to achieve maximum engine output. Alternatively, you can also refuel using premium-grade unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 95 RON.

As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption.

Never refuel using petrol of an even lower RON. Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.

Information on additives in petrol (vehicles with petrol engine)

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 362).

NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives

Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring.

Only add cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives.

In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Deposits could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre), mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank.

Information on fuel quality for vehicles with a diesel engine

General notes

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 362).

WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.

▶ Never refuel using petrol in diesel engines.
▶ Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Vehicles with a diesel particulate filter:

Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent specification. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.

Vehicle without diesel particulate filter:

Only refuel using diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 500 ppm.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Petrol
• Marine diesel

• Heating oil

• Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable oil

• Paraffin or kerosene

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

▶ Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The following compatibility indications for fuel apply to your vehicle:

For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% fatty acid methyl ester by volume (bio-diesel)
For diesel fuel with a maximum of 10% fatty acid methyl ester by volume (bio-diesel)

According to European standard EN 16942 you can find the compatibility indications at the following locations:

• On the vehicle on the information label on the fuel filler flap (→ page 171)
• On the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe

Information on low outside temperatures

Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of winter.

Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel tank should be empty, if possible. When first refuelling with winter diesel fuel, keep the fuel level low, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank can be filled as usual when next refuelling.

Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.

Tank content and fuel reserve

The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment.

Total fuel tank capacity

Model
CLS 350 66.0 litres
CLS 450 4MATIC 66.0 litres	or80.0 litres
All other models 50.0 litres	or66.0 litres

Reserve fuel tank

Model
CLS 450 4MATIC 7.0 litres	or12.0 litres
All other models 7.0 litres

AdBlue ^® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)

Notes on AdBlue®

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 362).

AdBlue ^® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It may be improper or punishable in some countries to operate a vehicle that uses no AdBlue ^® or one that does not comply with the specifications of this Owner's Manual.

NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution of AdBlue ^® or the use of additive-enhanced AdBlue ^®

The function of the NOx exhaust gas after-treatment can be impaired by the use of unsuitable denoxification agents.

Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241.
Do not dilute AdBlue® with water.
Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®.

NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to impurities in AdBlue®

Consequences of impurities in AdBlue®:

• increased emission values
- damage to the catalytic converter
- NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment malfunctions

Avoid impurities in AdBlue®.

AdBlue ^® residues crystallise after a period of time, and contaminate the surfaces with which they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces with water as soon as possible.

When you open the AdBlue ^® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only fill the AdBlue ^® tank in well-ventilated areas.

AdBlue® filling capacity and consumption

Total capacity of AdBlue ^® tank

Model Total capacity

All models 23.5 litres

AdBlue® consumption

The average AdBlue ^® consumption is between 1% and 5% of fuel consumption. Like fuel consumption, AdBlue ^® consumption is highly dependent upon driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, your vehicle's actual consumption figures in day-to-day operating conditions may differ from the consumption figures calculated. The frequency at which you will have to top up AdBlue ^® will also vary. Have the AdBlue ^® supply checked at a qualified specialist workshop before making journeys outside Europe. Before a longer stay outside Europe, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

AdBlue ^® range and fill level

You can have the AdBlue ^® range and level displayed on the driver's display.

The AdBlue® range shown is highly dependent upon driving style and operating conditions. The actual range therefore may deviate from the range currently displayed on the driver's display.

The information supplied in the Owner's Manual regarding the reserve quantity at the first warning on the driver's display and the minimum top-up quantity when the AdBlue ^® tank is empty is also to be understood as guide values.

Engine oil

Notes on engine oil

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 362).

NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives

Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifications necessary for the prescribed service intervals.
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
Do not use additives.
Have the engine oil changed after the prescribed intervals.

Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Quality and capacity of engine oil

Engine oil specifications

Petrol engines MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

All models 229.51, 229.52,	229.61, 229.71
	229.72*

Engine oil specifications

Diesel engines MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

CLS 400 d 4MATIC 229.52

229.61*

All other models 229.52, 229.61,
	229.71
	229.72*

* recommended for lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes)

To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifications marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed.

If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only.

Engine oils for one-time filling only in exceptional cases:

• Vehicles with a petrol engine: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3
• Vehicles with a diesel engine:

• CLS 400 d 4MATIC: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51 or ACEA C3
• All other models: ACEA C3

The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.

Engine oil filling capacity

Model Capacity
CLS 220 d 6.3 litres
CLS 300 d 4MATIC 6.5 litres
CLS 350 6.6 litres
CLS 400 d 4MATIC 7.5 litres
CLS 450 4MATIC 8.5 litres

Notes on brake fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 362).

WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake system

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard.

This impairs the braking effect.

Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.

Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.

Coolant

Notes on coolant

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 362).

⚠ WARNING Risk of fire- and injury from antifreeze

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite.

Allow the engine to cool down before you top up the antifreeze.

Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening.
Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle.

NOTE Damage caused by incorrect coolant

▶ Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection. Information on coolant is available at the following locations:

• In the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 320.1
- At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com
• At a qualified specialist workshop

NOTE Overheating at high outside temperatures

If an inappropriate coolant is used, the cooling system is not sufficiently protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures.

▶ Only use coolant approved for Mercedes-Benz.
Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 320.1.

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the cooling system:

• A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -37°C)
• A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45°C)

Notes on windscreen washer fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 362).

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer fluid

Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.

Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.

NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids

Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other windscreen washer fluids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously.

Recommended windscreen washer fluid:

• above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
• below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container.

Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.

Vehicle data

Vehicle dimensions

The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors:

• Tyres
• Load
  • Condition of the suspension
• Optional equipment

Vehicle dimensions

All models
Vehicle length 4996 mm
Vehicle width includ-ing exterior mirrors	2069 mm
Vehicle width exclud-ing exterior mirrors	1890 mm
Wheelbase 2939 mm

Vehicle height

Model Vehicle height
CLS 220 d	1429 mm
CLS 350
All other models 1435 mm

Weights and loads

Please observe the following notes for the specified vehicle data:

• Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload.
• Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 360).

Roof load

Model Maximum roof load
All models 100 kg

Maximum design speeds

The maximum design speed can differ from the stated figures in practice. It depends on the operating conditions, the optional equipment and the size of the tyres.

Not for Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Maximum design speed

Model
All models

Trailer hitch

General notes on the trailer hitch

Modifications to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissible if a towing capacity is specified in your vehicle documents.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mounting dimensions

Fastening points
2 Overhang dimension
3 Rear axle centre line

The overhang dimension and fastening points are valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory.

Overhang dimension length

Model 2 Ov	erhang dimension
All models 1260 mm

Towing capacity

The drawbar load is not included in the towing capacity.

Towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 12%)

Model Towing capacity,	braked
All models 1900 kg

Towing capacity, unbraked

Model Towing capacity,	unbraked
All models 750 kg

Maximum trailer hitch tongue weight -and load capacity

NOTE Damage caused by the trailer coming loose

If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose.► The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg.► Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight.

NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose

When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the maximal load capacity should be observed.► Do not exceed the permissible load capacity.

Observe the additional notes on the maximum load capacity ( page 245).

Drawbar load

Model Maximum drawbar load
All models 76 kg
Load capacity
All models Maximum load
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head	75 kg
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head and additionally to the guide pin	100 kg

Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation)

Trailer operation axle load
Model Axle load
CLS 220 d 1380 kg
CLS 400 d 4MATIC 1400 kg
CLS 450 4MATIC 1440 kg
All other models 1425 kg

Display messages

Introduction

Information about display messages

Display messages appear on the instrument display.

Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the instrument display. The instrument display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone.

Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in the Owner's Manual.

For some display messages, symbols will also be shown:

• i Further information
• × Hide display message

With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Pressing ⓘ displays further information on

the media display. Press the × symbol to hide the display message.

Display messages to be acknowledged can be hidden by pressing the back button ↩ or with the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory.

Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible.

High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The instrument display will show these display messages permanently until the cause of the display message has been rectified.

Calling up saved display messages

On-board computer:

→ Service ▶ 1 message

If there are no display messages, No messages will appear on the instrument display.

▶ Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To exit the message memory: press the back button ↩.

Occupant safety

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Restraint sys. malfunction Consult workshop

Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example)

Left windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example)

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 41).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 41).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 41).

WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag

The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.

Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual	* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
	WARNING - Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabledIf the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function.A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.
	Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (→ page 50).If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual	* The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations:even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seateven when the front passenger seat is not occupiedThe system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabledIf you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.The child could be struck by the airbag.Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
	Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (→ page 50).If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual	* The PRE-SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual	* The PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Key

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Replace key	* Have the key replaced.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Change key batteries	* The key battery is discharged.► Replace the battery (→ page 77).
Key not detected (white display message)	* The key is currently undetected.► Change the location of the key in the vehicle.► Try to start the vehicle.► If the key is still not detected, place it in the slot for starting with the key (→ page 154).► Start the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Key not detected (red display message)

Key being initialised Please wait

* The key can no longer be detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle. If the key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the vehicle:

• You can no longer start the vehicle.
• You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
▶ Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.

If the key is in the vehicle and is still not detected:

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key ( page 154).

The key battery is weak or discharged.

▶ Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 75).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 77).

* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key.

▶ Wait until processing is complete.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual	* Key detection is malfunctioning.▶ Change the location of the key in the vehicle.▶ Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (→ page 154).

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Left dipped beam (example)	* The corresponding light source is defective.► Drive on carefully.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.i LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty.
Malfunction See Owner's Manual	* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.* Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.► Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (→ page 336).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Automatic driving lights inoperative

Active Light System inoper- ative

Switch on headlamps

Switch off lights

* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The active headlamps are malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* You are driving without low-beam headlamps. ▶ Turn the light switch to the 📋D or AUTO position.

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. ▶ Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Intelligent Light System inoperative	* The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of the Intelligent Light System.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 131).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist available again display message will appear.▶ Drive on▶ Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailableSee Owner's Manual	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 132).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display message will appear.Drive onOperate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.Drive onorStop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning	* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Climate control

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
inoperative See Owner's Man.	* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.▶ When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.▶ If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
inoperative Battery low	* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.The stationary heater has switched itself off.▶ Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.
inoperative Refuel vehicle	* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.▶ Refuel the vehicle.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Vehicle is operationalSwitch off ignition before exiting	* You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state.▶ Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you.▶ If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).
Operation only possible in transmission position P	* The ball neck will not swivel because transmission position D, R or neutral N is selected.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Engage park position P.
Trailer coupling extending...	* The ball neck is retracting/extending.Do not attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate the swivel movement using your hand, foot or other aids. During the swivel movement, do not couple a trailer.When the ball neck has reached an operational position, the display message will disappear.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Check trailer hitch

lock (white display message)

* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.

WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked

The trailer may become detached.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

▶ Initiate a new swivel movement ( page 240).
When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.

Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.

Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.
If the ball neck has been retracted: initiate a new swivel movement ( page 240).

The ball neck will engage vertically in the locked position and then engage beneath the bumper.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ If the ball neck has been extended: initiate a new swivel movement (→ page 240).The ball neck will engage beneath the bumper.If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.▶ Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes:· malfunctions in the power supply· signal interference▶ Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Head-up display inoperative	* The head-up display has an internal error.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual	WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristicsIf the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
	* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.
Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual	WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impairedIf the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual	* The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	* At least one door is open.Close all doors.
	* The bonnet is open.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlockedThe bonnet may open and block your view.▶ Never release the bonnet when driving.▶ Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Close the bonnet (→ page 306).
	* The boot lid is open.⚠ DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoningCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.▶ Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.▶ Never drive with the boot lid open.
	▶ Close the boot lid.
Rear left seat backrest not locked (example)	* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.▶ Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.
Top up washer fluid	* The washer fluid le vel in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.▶ Top up the washer fluid (→ page 310).
Wiper malfunctioning	* The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning.▶ Restart the vehicle.If the display message still appears:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
To switch off the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times.	* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.▶ Information about switching off the vehicle while driving (→ page 153).
Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual	* The vehicle cannot be started.▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Top up coolant See Owner's Manual	* The coolant level is too low.■ NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant▶ Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.▶ Add coolant (→ page 310).▶ Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off

* The coolant is too hot.

▶ Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of bums when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
- You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

▶ Wait until the engine has cooled down.
Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.

There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system.

Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120^ C.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Reserve fuel level	* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.▶ Refuel.
Clean the fuel filter	* Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel filter is dirty or the water in the fuel filter needs to be drained.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Replace air cleaner	* Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary	* It is possible to select the park position P only if the vehicle is stationary. ▶ Depress the brake pedal to stop.▶ Shift the transmission to park position P when the vehicle is stationary.
Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position	* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position P and into another transmission position.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Select transmission position D, R or neutral N.
To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine	* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position P or neutral N and into another transmission position.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Start the vehicle.▶ Change the transmission position.
Apply brake to select D or R	* You have attempted to select transmission position D or R.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Select transmission position D or R.
Apply brake to select R	* You have attempted to select transmission position R.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Select transmission position R.
Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P	* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position D, R or neutral N is selected. The vehicle may roll away.▶ Select park position P when switching off the vehicle.
N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling	* While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutral N has been engaged.▶ Depress the brake pedal to stop.▶ Shift the transmission to park position P when the vehicle is stationary.▶ To continue driving, select transmission position D or R.
Without changing gear, consult workshop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.▶ If transmission position D is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.▶ For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Reversing not poss. Consult workshop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position R.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction Stop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral N automatically.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Engage park position P.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cooling	* The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible. ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. ▶ Leave the engine running. ▶ Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message)	* The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ▶ Until then, always select park position [P] manually before you switch off the vehicle. ▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display message)	* Vehicles with automatic transmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission: until then, always select park position [P] before you switch off the vehicle. ▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Brakes

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Parking brake See Owner's Manual

* The yellow [P] indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To apply:

▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on
Apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 180).

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp and the red (P) indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To release:

▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on.
Release the electric parking brake manually ( page 180).

or

Release the electric parking brake automatically ( page 179).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp is lit and the red (P) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.

▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on.

To apply:

Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 180).

To release:

Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red (P) indicator lamp continues to flash:

Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp is lit and the red (P) indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

If the state of charge is too low:

Charge the 12 V battery.

To apply:

Switch off the vehicle. The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

	If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the vehicle switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised.If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:► Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on► Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (→ page 180).If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.► Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.To release:► If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually (→ page 180).If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:► Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Release parking brake	* The red (P) indicat or lamp is flashing.The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (→ page 179).You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (→ page 180).
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.▶ Release the electric parking brake manually.
Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake	* The red (P) indicat or lamp is lit.You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched off.▶ Switch on the vehicle.
Check brake fluid level	* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid levelIf the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Do not top up the brake fluid.
Check brake pads See Owner's Manual	* The brakepads have reached the wear limit.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Off	* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.▶ Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (→ page 187).
ATTENTION ASSIST inoper-ative	* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!	* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (→ page 189).▶ If necessary, take a break.
---km/h	* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.▶ Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (→ page 192).
Cruise control inoperative	* Cruise control is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative	* Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise control off	* Cruise control has been deactivated.If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (→ page 190).
---km/h	* The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Limiter passive	* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter will switch to passive mode (→ page 192).
Limiter inoperative	* The limiter is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
--- km/h	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.▶ Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 196).
suspended	* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (→ page 194).
Off	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (→ page 196).
Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 194).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive on carefully.or▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Distance Assist inoperative	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.▶ Drive on carefully.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist available again	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.▶ Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 196).
Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable.▶ Drive onOnce the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Speed Limit Assist inoperative	* Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
120km/h!Maximum speed exceeded	* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).▶ Drive more slowly.
Speed limit (winter tyres)XXX km/h	* You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 201).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive on▶ Check the tyre pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist inoperative	* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops	* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.▶ Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back onActive Steering Assist is available once more.
Beginning emergency stop	* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (→ page 203).▶ Put your hands back on the steering wheel.You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:SteeringBraking or acceleratingDeactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
	* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (→ page 201).You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.▶ Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual	* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 201).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive on.
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual	* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning.Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.▶ Drive on.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ It is possible to continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations.
Traffic Sign Assist inoperative	* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.▶ It is possible to continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 212).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Drive onor▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist inoperative	* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual	* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.▶ Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 212).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Drive onor▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative	* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.► Drive onor► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual	* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.► Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 215).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.► Drive on
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.► Drive onor► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Four-step traffic safety icons with Chinese labels: car, road ahead, speedometer, and car warning sign.

temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty

* Front and corner radar sensors (hereafter "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes:

• The sensors are dirty
- Heavy rain or snow
• Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally.

Drive on carefully.

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off.

If the display message does not disappear:

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Clean all sensor covers from outside ( page 182).
▶ Restart the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

temporarily unavailable Camera view restricted

* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes:

• Dirt on the windscreen in the field of vision of the multifunction camera
  • Heavy rain, snow or fog
• Mist on the inside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside of the windscreen during cold times of year in particular.

This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally.

Drive on carefully.

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off.

If the display message does not disappear:

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera ( page 182).
▶ Restart the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h

Stop vehicle Vehicle too low

* AIR BODY CONTROL is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

No faster than 80 km/h.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low.

Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
▶ Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning:

No faster than 80 km/h and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements

▶ Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.
If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Set a higher vehicle level (→ page 219).Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.
Lowering	* The vehicle level will lower for the following reasons:You have selected a different drive program.You have exceeded the speed limit.You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button.
Vehicle rising	* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
Vehicle rising Please wait	* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Please reduce speed	* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.To adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 60 km/h.To adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive at speeds greater than 30 km/h.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual

* Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.

The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

▶ Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

inoperative See Owner's Manual

* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

Drive on carefully.
Have ABS and ESP ^® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning ^

If ESP ^ is malfunctioning, ESP ^ cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
▶ Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
inoperative See Owner's Manual	* ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioningIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

inoperative See Owner's Manual

Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual

* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP ^® are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

Drive on carefully.
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRE-SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.

Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.

Drive on carefully.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
or
If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual

* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available:Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionEvasive Steering AssistPRE-SAFE® PLUSVehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.Drive on carefully.orStop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Inoperative	* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Device detected at diagnostics connection See Owner's Manual

* The vehicle functions for fault detection are restricted.
At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.
Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection ( page 32).
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

12 V battery See Owner's Manual

See Owner's Manual

* The vehicle is off and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.

▶ Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
Drive for 30-60 mins.

or

▶ Charge the 12 V battery when stationary ( page 330).

* If the message appears while the vehicle is switched on, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The 12 V battery is not being charged.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue drivingDo not continue driving under any circumstances.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual	* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue drivingDo not continue driving under any circumstances.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.Switch off the vehicle.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Stop vehicle Leave engine running	* The state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.► Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.► Leave the engine running.► If the display message disappears: drive on.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible	* The 48 V battery is overheating. There is a risk of fire.► Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.► If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out. ⓘ Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.► Do not continue driving.► If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire.
48 V battery See Owner's Manual	* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions.Comfort functions may be restricted.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Please wait 48 V battery charging	* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance.The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, theMotor can be started againdisplay message will be shown on the instrument display.▶ Start the vehicle.▶ Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle.If theMotor can be started againdisplay message does not appear after a few minutes:▶ Try to start the vehicle.▶ If the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual	* The state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle.▶ Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.▶ Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connection point of the 12 V battery (→ page 330).The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.
Motor can be started again	* The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.▶ Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.

Tyre pressure monitor

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable	* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.▶ Drive on
Tyre press. monitor inoperative	* The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.⚠ WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioningThe tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.▶ Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors	* The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.▶ Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
Wheel sensor(s) missing	* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor in at least one wheel. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tyre.▶ Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.
Check tyre(s)	⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressureThe tyres can burst.The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.You could then lose control of the vehicle.▶ Observe the recommended tyre pressures.▶ Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
	▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Check the tyre pressure (→ page 341) and the tyres.
Rectify tyre pressure	* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the difference in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great.▶ Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.▶ When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitor (→ page 344).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Warning tyre defect

* The pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.

⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre

• The tyres can overheat and be damaged.
- The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

Do not drive with a flat tyre.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible speed with a flat MOExtended tyre.
Observe the notes on flat tyres.

Notes on flat tyres ( page 321).

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Check the tyres.

* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.

Tyre(s) overheated

WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres

Overheated tyres can burst.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
	* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
Reduce speed	⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyresOverheated tyres can burst.▶ Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

Tyre pressure loss warning system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Tyre pressure Check tyres	* The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss of pressure.
	WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressureThe tyres can burst.The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.You could then lose control of the vehicle.▶ Observe the recommended tyre pressures.▶ Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
	▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Check the tyre pressure (→ page 341) and the tyres.▶ When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (→ page 344).
Check tyre pressures then restart Run Flat Indicator	* The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.▶ When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (→ page 344).
Run Flat Indicator inoperative	* The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Exhaust gas aftertreatment

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual

* The AdBlue ^ level has fallen into the reserve range.

Top up AdBlue® immediately (→ page 175).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual	* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been covered.► Top up with AdBlue® immediately (→ page 175).
XX,X I Top up AdBlue Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km	* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed displayed.After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.► Top up with at least the indicated amount of AdBlue® (→ page 175).
XX,X I Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss.	* The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle.► Top up with at least the indicated amount of AdBlue® (→ page 175).► Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds.► Start the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual

AdBlue system fault Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual

AdBlue system fault Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed has been covered.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* Power restriction due to the AdBlue® system fault. After the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Engine oil

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling

* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

▶ Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil ( page 308).

Notes on engine oil ( page 368).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Engine oil level Reduce oil level

Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off

* The engine oil level is too high.

NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil

▶ Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.

* The engine oil level is too low.

NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

▶ Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.
Add 1 l of engine oil ( page 308).
▶ Check the engine oil level.

Notes on engine oil (→ page 368).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine

Engine oil level cannot be measured

* The oil pressure is too low.

NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure

▶ Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps

Overview of indicator and warning lamps

Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behaviour is non-critical. These indicator and warning

lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the vehicle has been started or during a journey.

Instrument display

Depending on the display settings, the positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument display may differ from the example shown.

Indicator and warning lamps

Occupant safety

Restraint system ( page 434)

Seat belt ( page 434)

Vehicle

Trailer hitch (→ page 435)

Power steering ( page 435)

Engine

Coolant temperature ( page 437)

Engine diagnostics ( page 437)

700 Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow

Electrical fault ( page 437)

Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator ( page 437)

Brakes

(P) Electric parking brake (yellow) (→ page 440)

(P) Electric parking brake (red) (→ page 440)

Brakes (yellow) (→ page 440)

(1) Brakes (red) ( page 440)

Driving systems

Distance warning ( page 442)

Active Brake Assist (→ page 442)

Active Brake Assist (→ page 442)

AIR BODY CONTROL (→ page 442)

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL ( page 442)

Driving safety systems

ABS ( page 443)

ESP ^® (→ page 443)

OFF ESP® OFF (→ page 443)

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Tyre pressure monitoring system (→ page 446)

Exterior lighting

Standing lights (→ page 126)

Low beam (→ page 126)

ED High beam (→ page 128)

Turn signal lights (→ page 128)

0‡ Rear fog light (→ page 126)

Symbols on the media display

Drive Away Assist ( page 236)

Cross Traffic Alert (→ page 237)

Occupant safety

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Restraint system warning lamp	* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on.The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 41).⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint systemComponents in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Note the messages on the instrument display.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Seat belt warning lamp flashes	* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.▶ Fasten your seat belt (→ page 44).There are objects on the front passenger seat.▶ Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Seat belt warning lamp lights up

* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started.

In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.

The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.

▶ Fasten your seat belt ( page 44).

If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Power steering warning lamp (red)

* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.

The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Note the messages on the instrument display.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Trailer tow hitch warning lamp

* The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit.

The trailer hitch is not operational or is swivelling.

WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked

The trailer may become detached.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
▶ Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

Note the messages on the instrument display.

If the trailer hitch is swivelling:

▶ Wait until the ball neck has reached the operational position.

Engine

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Coolant warning lamp (red)

* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

Possible causes:

• The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
• The coolant level is too low
• The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
• The radiator fan is faulty
• The engine coolant pump is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120°C.

WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
• You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
  Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. Do not continue driving.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Note the messages on the instrument display.
	If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:
	▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale:
	▶ Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.
	▶ Check the coolant level (→ page 310).
	▶ Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
	▶ Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
Coolant warning lamp (yellow)	* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.Possible causes:
	• The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
	• The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty
	• The radiator shutters are blocked or defective
	▶ Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Engine diagnosis warning lamp

Electrical fault warning lamp

Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up

* The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.

Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.

Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked.

* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the electrics.

Note the messages on the instrument display.

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

Refuel.

Brakes

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red)

Electric parking brake indicator lamp (yellow)

Brake system warning lamp (yellow)

*The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit.

The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction.

Note the messages on the instrument display.

* The yellow brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.

WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction

If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.

Drive on carefully.

Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.

If the instrument display shows a display message, observe it.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Brake system warning lamp(red)	* The red brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.Possible causes:·The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.·There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.▶ Note the messages on the instrument display.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioningIf brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.▶ Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid levelIf the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Do not top up the brake fluid.

Driving systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Warning lamp for distance warning function	* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.▶ Be prepared to brake immediately.▶ Increase the distance.Function of Active Brake Assist (→ page 204).
Active Brake Assist warning lamp	* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted.▶ Note the messages on the instrument display.
Active Brake Assist warning lamp	* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.The system is switched off or the range of functions has been automatically restricted.This may be the case if another driving system has been activated.▶ Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (→ page 204).

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Suspension warning lamp (yellow)

* The yellow AIR BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit.

The yellow DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit.

A fault has occurred in the AIR BODY CONTROL.

A fault has occurred in the DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.

Note the messages on the instrument display.

Driving safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

ABS warning lamp

* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.

ABS is malfunctioning.

If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

Note the messages on the instrument display.

WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▸ Drive on carefully.▸ Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
ESP® warning lamp flashes	* The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (→ page 184).▸ Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
ESP® warning lamp lights up	* The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.▸ Note the messages on the instrument display.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
	If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.▸ Drive on carefully.▸ Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

ESP ^® OFF warning lamp

* The yellow ESP ^ OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP ^ is deactivated.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated

ESP ^® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.

▶ Drive on carefully.

▶ Deactivate ESP ^® only for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP ^ cannot be activated, ESP ^ is malfunctioning.

Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (→ page 184).

Tyre pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes	*The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
	WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioningThe tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up	*The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
	WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressureThe tyres can burst.The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.You could then lose control of the vehicle.Observe the recommended tyre pressures.Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
▶ Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.

1, 2, 3 ...

48 V on-board electrical system

Operating safety.... 21

360° Camera

Function.... 223

Switching automatic mode on/o

(reversing camera)...... 227

A

A/C function

Activating/deactivating (operating

unit)....143

MBUX....144

ABS....184

Acceleration

Kickdown.... 170

Optimised acceleration.... 156

Accident

ERA-GLONASS test mode.... 294

Accident, emergency call.... 292

Activating/deactivating the acoustic lock-

ing veri cation signal.... 76

Active Blind Spot Assist

Brake application.... 214

Exit warning.... 212

Function.... 212

Trailer operation.... 214

Active bonnet.... 305

Active Brake Assist

Function.... 204

Setting.... 208

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Activate/deactivate variable limiter..... 196

Activating/deactivating.... 196

Active Emergency Stop Assist...... 203

Calling up a speed.... 196

Function.... 194

Increasing/decreasing the speed...... 196

Route-based speed adaptation.... 199

Storing a speed.... 196

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 217

Function.... 215

Setting the sensitivity.... 218

Trailer operation.... 215

Active light function.... 129

Active Parking Assist

Automatic braking function.... 236

Exiting a parking space.... 234

Function.... 231

Parking 233

Pausing.... 235

Active Service System PLUS.... 303

Active Speed Limit Assist.... 198

Active Steering Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 203

Active Emergency Stop Assist...... 203

Function.... 201

Active Stop-and-Go Assist

Function.... 201

Active Tra c Jam Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 201

Adaptive brake lights.... 188

Adaptive cruise control.... 199

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 132

Function.... 131

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Function.... 132

Index 449

Switching on/off.... 133

AdBlue®

Additives.... 367

Capacity.... 367

Notes.... 174

Purity 367

Topping up.... 175

Additional door lock....78

Additives

AdBlue ^ 175,367

Engine oil.... 368

Fuel 364

After-sales service.... 303

AIR BODY CONTROL

Function 218

Setting....219

Air conditioning menu

Air distribution.... 144

Calling up.... 143

Climate control.... 144

Ionisation.... 145

Stationary heater/ventilation.... 148

Air distribution

Setting.... 142, 144

Air freshener system.... 145

Air inlet 311

Air pressure.... 341

Air suspension.... 218

Air vents

Setting.... 151

Air/water duct.... 311

Airbag

Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff..... 49

Deployment.... 41

Front airbag.... 46

Overview 46

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps..... 50

Protection.... 47

Reduced protection.... 48

Warning lamp.... 41

Airflow

Setting.... 142

Alarm system....95

All-wheel drive, 4MATIC.... 171

Alternative route.... 274

Ambient lighting.... 135

Animals....74

Anti-lock braking system.... 184

Anti-theft alarm system....95

Anti-theft protection

Additional door lock....78

Immobiliser....95

Approval numbers.... 359

Apps, Mercedes me

Mercedes me calls.... 283

Mercedes me connect.... 287

Assembly licence plate, front.... 22

Assistance system.... 183

ASSYST PLUS

Battery disconnection periods.... 304

Service interval display.... 303

Service requirements.... 303

ATA

Deactivating the alarm.... 95

Function....95

Interior protection....96, 97

Tow-away protection.... 95, 96

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function.... 189

Setting.... 190

Attention assistant.... 189

Authorised workshop.... 33

Automatic car wash.... 311

Automatic car wash mode.... 311

Automatic climate control.... 144

Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff

Function.... 49

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps..... 50

Automatic distance control.... 194

Automatic driving lights.... 127

Automatic emergency call.... 292

Automatic engine start/stop.... 160

Automatic mirror folding function.... 141

Automatic seat adjustment.... 104

Automatic transmission

Changing gear.... 166

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 166

Drive programs.... 164

DYNAMIC SELECT switch.... 164

Engaging drive position.... 168

Engaging neutral.... 167

Engaging reverse gear.... 167

Faulty gear shift.... 168

Kickdown....170

Manual shifting.... 169

Selecting park position.... 167

Steering wheel gearshift paddles..... 169

Transmission position display.... 166

Transmission positions.... 166

Autonomous braking.... 204

Axle load

Trailer operation.... 373

B

Bad weather light.... 130

Bag hook.... 118

Ball neck

Extending/retracting 240

Extending/retracting (MBUX multimedia system).... 242

Trailer coupling.... 243

BAS.... 184

Battery (12 V battery)

Charging.... 330

Notes.... 326

Notes (starting assistance and charging) 328

Replacing.... 331

Starting assistance.... 330

Battery (key).... 77

Battery (remote control).... 149

Battery (starter battery)

Charging via Remote Online.... 154

Belt....42

Bicycle rack

Load capacity.... 373

Trailer operation.... 245

Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 215

Function 212

BlueTec

AdBlue ^ 174

Bluetooth®

Connecting a mobile phone.... 282

Index 451

Bonnet

Active bonnet.... 305

Opening/closing 306

Boot lid

Closing....83

HANDS-FREE ACCESS....86

Locking separately.... 88

Opening....83

Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist.... 204

Brake Assist System.... 184

Brake Assist System.... 184

Brake fluid.... 369

Brake force distribution.... 186

Brake lamps

Adaptive brake lights.... 188

Brake pads....155

Brakes

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).... 184

Active Brake Assist.... 204

Adaptive brake lights.... 188

BAS (Brake Assist System).... 184

Driving tips.... 157

EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu-

tion).... 186

HOLD function.... 187

Limited braking effect (salt-treated

roads)....157

New/replaced brake pads/brake discs.. 155

Running-in notes.... 155

Braking assistance

Brake Assist System.... 184

Breakdown

Flat tyre.... 321

Overview of aids.... 14

Tow-starting.... 336

Towing away 332

Transporting the vehicle.... 334

Wheel change.... 350

C

Calling the customer centre for

Mercedes-Benz 283

Calls

Mercedes me....282

Using overhead control panel.... 282

Camera

360° Camera.... 223

Cleaning.... 315

Information.... 182

Opening the camera cover (reversing

camera).... 227

Reversing camera.... 221

Selecting the view.... 227

Car key....75

Car wash.... 311

Car-to-X communication

Hazard warnings.... 276

Care

Air/water duct.... 311

Automatic car wash.... 311

Camera.... 315

Car parts.... 315

Decorative foil 314

Display.... 316

Exterior lighting 315

Head-up display.... 316

High-pressure cleaner.... 312

Paint 313

Plastic trim.... 316

Real wood/trim elements.... 316

Roof lining.... 316

Seat belt 316

Steering wheel.... 316

Trailer hitch.... 315

Vehicle interior 316

Washing by hand.... 313

Caring for plastic trim.... 316

Caring for real wood.... 316

Caring for rims.... 315

Caring for the roof lining.... 316

Caring for the steering wheel.... 316

Caring for trim elements.... 316

Central locking system

Button....79

Key....76

Charging 12 V battery.... 330

USB port.... 115, 123

Chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL)

Setting.... 219

Checking the coolant level.... 310

Child safety lock

Rear door....72

Side window (rear).... 73

Child seat

Approval categories.... 60

Basic instructions.... 54

Fitting ISOFIX/i-Size.... 63

Front passenger seat.... 70

Recommendations for child restraint

systems.... 58

Risks/dangers.... 55

Seats suitable for belt-secured child

restraint systems.... 66

Seats suitable for i-Size child restraint

systems.... 63

Seats suitable for ISOFIX child

restraint systems.... 61

Securing.... 59

Securing to the front passenger seat

with the seat belt.... 71

Securing to the rear seat with the

seatbelt....68

Top Tether 65

Without automatic co-driver airbag sh

utoff....69

Children

Avoiding dangers in the vehicle.... 55

Basic instructions.... 54

Chock 349

City lighting 130

Clean varnish.... 313

Cleaning

Air/water duct.... 311

Automatic car wash.... 311

Car parts.... 315

Decorative foil.... 314

High-pressure cleaner.... 312

Paint 313

Vehicle interior.... 316

Washing by hand.... 313

Cleaning carpets.... 316

Cleaning seat covers.... 316

Cleaning the sensors.... 315

Climate control

A/C function.... 144

Activating/deactivating.... 143

Activating/deactivating the A/C func-

THERMATIC control panel.... 142

THERMOTRONIC control panel.... 142

Ventilation with comfort opening.... 90

Climate style
Function.... 144
Setting.... 144

Co-driver airbag shutoff, PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF....49

COC papers, Certificate of conformity.... 357

Cockpit Dashboard overview.... 6

Coffee cup symbol.... 189

Collision detection (parked vehicle) Setting.... 180

Combination switch Lights....128 Windscreen wipers....136

Commuter route....274

Component-specific information.... 359

Convenience closing....90

Convenience opening....90

Coolant 369

Copyright.... 39

Cornering light.... 129

Correct use.... 34

Cover 91

Cross traffic (warning).... 237

Cross Traffic Alert, Cross traffic warning..... 237

Crosswind Assist.... 186

Cruise control activating/deactivating.... 192
Calling up a speed.... 192
Function.... 190
Requirements: 192
Setting a speed.... 192
Storing a speed.... 192

D

Damping system ADS PLUS.... 218

Dashboard Cockpit overview......6

Dashcam Selecting a USB device.... 278

Starting/stopping a video recording..... 278

Data processing in the vehicle.... 35

Data protection rights.... 39

Data storage

Data protection rights.... 39

Electronic control units.... 35

Online services.... 38

Deactivating the alarm....95

Dealership.... 33

Declaration of conformity

Electromagnetic compatibility.... 23

Importer addresses.... 30

Jack.... 31

Specific absorption rate.... 23

TREFIT kit.... 32

Wireless vehicle components.... 23

Decorative foil.... 314

DeNOx agent

AdBlue ^® 174

Destination entry.... 273

Detecting inattentiveness.... 189

Diagnostics connection.... 32

Diesel

Low outside temperatures.... 365

Notes.... 365

Digital Owner's Manual.... 16

DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission.... 166

Engaging drive position.... 168

Engaging neutral.... 167

Engaging park position automatically..... 167

Engaging reverse gear.... 167

Function.... 166

Gearshift recommendation.... 169

Manual gearshifting.... 169

Selecting park position.... 167

Display

Care.... 316

Display (on-board computer)

Displays on the instrument display...... 253

Display message

Calling up in the on-board computer..... 374

Notes.... 374

Display messages

---km/h 403

LIM --- km/h 402

- - - km/h.... 402

12 V battery See Owner's Man-

ual....419

48 V battery See Owner's Man-

ual.... 421

Active Light System inoperative.... 381

AdBlue system fault Emer. op.:

max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km.... 429

AdBlue system fault Emergency

op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual.... 429

AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible.... 430

AdBlue system fault See Own-er's Manual.... 429

Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling.... 430

ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative.... 401

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
break!401
Automatic driving lights inoper-
ative.... 381
Battery overheated Stop,
everybody out! Outdoors if possible..... 421
Change key batteries.... 378
(1) Check brake fluid level.... 400
Check trailer hitch lock (white
display message).... 386
Check tyre(s) 424
Clean the fuel filter.... 393
Coolant Stop vehicle Switch
engine off.... 392
currently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual.... 414
currently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual.... 415
Engine oil level cannot be
measured.... 432

Engine oil level Reduce oil level.... 431
Engine oil level Stop vehicle
Switch engine off 431
Engine oil pressure Stop Switch
off engine 432
Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h..... 412
Front left malfunction Consult
workshop (example)...... 375
inoperative Battery low.... 384
inoperative Refuel vehicle.... 384
inoperative See Owner's Man..... 384
inoperative See Owner's Manual.. 415
inoperative See Owner's Manual.. 416
EBD inoperative See Owner's Manual.. 417
SOS Inoperative.... 418
Intelligent Light System inoper-
ative 382
Key being initialised Please wait... 379
Key not detected (red display
message).... 379

Key not detected (white display message).... 378
Left dipped beam (example)..... 380
Left windowbag malfunction
Consult workshop (example).... 375
Lowering.... 413
Malfunction See Owner's Man-
ual....380
120 cm/h! Maximum speed exceeded..... 405
428
Off 403
HOLD Off 401
Operation only possible in
transmission position P.... 385
(P) Parking brake See Owner's
Manual....397
Please reduce speed.... 413
Please wait 48 V battery charg-
ing....422

Rear left seat backrest not locked (example).... 390
Rectify tyre pressure.... 424
Reduce speed.... 426
Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual 427
(P) Release parking brake.... 399
Replace air cleaner.... 393
Replace key.... 378
Reserve fuel level.... 393
Restraint sys. malfunction Consult workshop.... 375
See Owner's Manual.... 419
Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual...... 388
Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual.... 388
Stop vehicle Leave engine running.... 421

Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual.... 420
Stop vehicle Vehicle too low..... 412
suspended....403
Switch off lights.... 381
Switch on headlamps.... 381
temporarily unavailable Camera view restricted.... 411
temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty.... 410
Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual.... 428
Top up coolant See Owner's Manual.... 391
Top up washer fluid.... 390
Trailer coupling extending.... 385
(P) Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake.... 400
Tyre(s) overheated.... 425

Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting.... 385
Vehicle rising Please wait...... 413
Vehicle rising.... 413
Warning tyre defect.... 425
Wheel sensor(s) missing...... 423
XX,X I Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss....428
Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 408
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative...... 409
Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual....409
Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual.... 388
Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual...... 417

Index 457

Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual.... 418
Active Distance Assist available again..... 404
Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 403
Active Distance Assist inoperative...... 404
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 409
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative... 409
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.... 406
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 405
Active Steering Assist inoperative..... 405
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual.... 406
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual.... 407

Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 382
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative.... 382
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual... 383
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative.... 383
Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position.... 394
Apply brake to select D or R.... 394
Apply brake to select R.... 394
Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display message).... 396
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message).... 396
Beginning emergency stop.... 406
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 407
Blind Spot Assist inoperative.... 408

Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual..... 408
Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual.... 391, 422
Check brake pads See Owner's Manual.... 400
Check tyre pressures then restart Run Flat Indicator.... 427
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative.... 402
Cruise control inoperative.... 402
Cruise control off.... 402
Device detected at diagnostics connection See Owner's Manual.... 419
Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual.... 376
Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual....376
Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning.... 383
Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 387

Head-up display inoperative.... 387

Limiter inoperative.... 402

Limiter passive.... 402

Motor can be started again.... 422

N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling.... 395

Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary.... 393

Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual.... 414

Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual.... 380

PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual.... 377

PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual.... 377

Reversing not poss. Consult workshop... 395

Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P.... 394

Run Flat Indicator inoperative.... 427

Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h..... 405

Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 404

Speed Limit Assist inoperative.... 404

Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cooling.... 396

To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine.... 394

To switch off the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times.... 391

Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 407

Traffic Sign Assist inoperative.... 407

Transmission Malfunction Stop...... 395

Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable....423

Tyre press. monitor inoperative.... 423

Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors.... 423

Tyre pressure Check tyres...... 426

Wiper malfunctioning.... 390

Without changing gear, consult work- shop.... 395

Displaying road names/house numbers..... 274

Displays Home screen.... 258

Distance control.... 194

Distance warning.... 204

DISTRONIC.... 194

Door

Additional door lock.... 78

Child safety lock (rear door).... 72

Emergency key 82

Opening (from the inside).... 79

Power closing function.... 81

Unlocking (inside).... 79

Door control panel Seat operation.... 12

Drive Away Assist.... 236

Drive position Engaging.... 168

Drive program display.... 165

Drive programs

Selecting.... 165

Driver's seat

Adjusting (Seat Comfort).... 99

Adjusting electrically.... 101

Easy entry and exit feature.... 109

Seat heating.... 105

Driving abroad

Light adjustment low beam.... 126

Driving safety system

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).... 184

Active Brake Assist.... 204

Adaptive brake lights.... 188

AIR BODY CONTROL.... 218

ATTENTION ASSIST.... 189

BAS (Brake Assist System).... 184

Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot

Assist.... 212

Cameras.... 182

Cruise control.... 190

EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu-

tion)....186

ESP ^® (Electronic Stability Program)...... 184

Hill Start Assist.... 188

HOLD function.... 187

On radar and ultrasonic sensors..... 182

Overview.... 183

STEER CONTROL.... 187

Traffic Sign Assist.... 210

Trailer Manoeuvering Assist.... 237

Your responsibility.... 182

Driving system.... 183

Driving tips

General driving tips.... 157

Light adjustment when driving abroad.... 126

Optimised acceleration.... 156

Running-in notes.... 155

Drowsiness detection.... 189

Duplicate key....78

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL

Damping characteristics (suspension).... 218

Dynamic handling control system.... 184

DYNAMIC SELECT

Calling up the fuel consumption indi-

cator....166

Configuring drive program I.... 165

Displaying engine data.... 165

Displaying vehicle data.... 165

Drive program display.... 165

Drive programs.... 164

Function.... 164

Selecting the drive program.... 165

E

E10.... 363

Easy entry feature

Function.... 109

Easy exit feature

Function.... 109

EBD, Electronic Brakeforce Distribution..... 186

ECO Assist

48 V on-board electrical system..... 162

ECO display.... 162

ECO start/stop button

Automatic engine start/stop.... 161

ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine start.... 160

Automatic engine stop.... 160

Function.... 160

Switching off/on.... 161

Electric parking brake

Applying automatically.... 178

Emergency braking.... 180

Manually applying/releasing.... 180

Releasing automatically.... 179

Electrical fuses.... 336

Electromagnetic compatibility

Declaration of conformity.... 23

Electronic Stability Program.... 184

Emergency

Fire extinguisher.... 320

First-aid kit (soft sided).... 320

Overview of aids.... 14

Safety vest.... 319

Warning triangle.... 320

Emergency braking

Active Brake Assist.... 204

Brake Assist System.... 184

Carrying out.... 180

Electric parking brake/handbrake..... 178

Emergency call

Automatic.... 292

Manual.... 293

Emergency call system

Mercedes me connect.... 292

Emergency key

Door....82

Inserting/removing.... 77

Emergency operation mode

Start the vehicle.... 154

Emergency stop assistant, Active Emer-

gency Stop Assist.... 203

Engine

Emergency operation mode.... 154

Engine number.... 360

Starting assistance.... 328

Switching off, start/stop button.... 177

Tow-starting.... 336

Engine data

Displaying.... 165

DYNAMIC SELECT.... 165

Engine electronics..

Engine number.... 360

Engine oil

Additives.... 368

Capacity 368

Checking the oil level using the on-

board computer.... 308

MB-Freigabe / MB-Approval.... 368

Quality.... 368

Topping up.... 308

Engine starting

Remote Online.... 155

Start/stop button.... 153

Environmentally friendly driving.... 18

ERA-GLONASS test mode 294

ESC, Electronic Stability Control.... 184

ESP®

Crosswind Assist.... 186

Function.... 184

Setting.... 186

Trailer stabilisation.... 186

EU type approval number 360

Exhaust gas aftertreatment, diesel engine.... 367

Exit warning.... 212

Exiting a parking space

Active Parking Assist.... 231

Drive Away Assist.... 236

PARKTRONIC.... 227

Exterior lighting Care.... 315

F

Factory settings MBUX.... 270

Fault message Instrument display.... 374

Film covering On cameras/sensors.... 182 On radar and ultrasonic sensors.... 182

Fire extinguisher.... 320

First aid First-aid kit (soft sided).... 320

Fitting Snow chains.... 340 Tyres/wheels.... 354

Flacon....146

Flat towing Pulling/towing.... 247

Flat tyre MOExtended.... 321 Notes.... 321

TREFIT kit.... 323 Wheel change.... 350

Floor mats....125

Fog light (extended range).... 130

Fragrance.... 145

Fragrance system Inserting/removing the flacon.... 146 Perfume vial.... 146

Free software.... 39

Frequencies Two-way radio.... 358

Front airbag....46

Front headlamps.... 126

Front passenger seat Adjusting (Seat Comfort).... 99 Adjusting electrically.... 101

Fuel Additives....364 Diesel....365 Diesel quality....365 E10....363 Low outside temperatures....365 Petrol....363

Petrol quality 363

Refilling....171

Reserve 366

Sulphur content.... 363

Tank content.... 366

Fuel consumption indicator.... 166

Fuel reserve.... 366

Function seat.... 12

Fuses Boot......339 Cockpit......338 Engine compartment......337 Front passenger footwell......339 Fuse assignment diagram......336 Notes......336

G

Gearshift Manual.... 169

Gearshift paddles Steering wheel gearshift paddles..... 169

General driving tips.... 157

Genuine parts.... 19

Glide mode.... 170

Glove compartment.... 115

Grab handles.... 98

Gross mass.... 360

H

Handbrake.... 178

Handling characteristics Unusual.... 340

HANDS-FREE ACCESS.... 86

Hazard warning lights.... 128

Hazard warnings Car-to-X communication.... 276

Head restraint Adjusting (rear).... 103 Adjusting manually (front).... 101 Luxury head restraint (front).... 102

Head-up display, Display in the wind- screen Adjusting brightness (on-board com- puter).... 254 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer).... 254

Care.... 316

Function.... 253

Memory function.... 111

Setting the position (on-board computer).... 254
Switching on/off.... 255

Headlamp flashing.... 128

Headlamps Automatic.... 126

Heating Activating/deactivating.... 143 Panel heating.... 107 Seat.... 105 Stationary heater.... 147

Help call Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.. 292

High beam Activating/deactivating.... 128

High-pressure cleaner.... 312

Hill Start Assist.... 188

HOLD function Function.... 187 Switching on/off.... 187

Home screen Media display.... 258

Hooking the luggage net.... 119

Household socket.... 122

1

i-Size child restraint system Fitting....63 Suitable seats....63

Identification plate Engine....360 Vehicle....360

Immobiliser....95

Implied warranty.... 35

Importer addresses Wireless components.... 30

Indicator/warning lamps.... 432

Individual drive program Configuring.... 165

Inside rearview mirror.... 139

Instrument cluster Function/notes.... 250

Index 463

Instrument display

Buttons.... 251

Function/notes.... 250

Head-up display.... 253

Head-up display menu.... 254

Instrument cluster....8

Notes 249

Overview of displays.... 253

Warning/indicator lamps.... 432

Intelligent Light System

Activating/deactivating.... 130

Active light function.... 129

Adaptive Highbeam Assist.... 131

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus.... 132

Bad weather light.... 130

City lighting.... 130

Cornering light.... 129

Enhanced fog light function.... 130

Motorway mode.... 130

Overview....129

Interior lighting

Adjusting.... 134

Ambient lighting.... 135

MBUX reading light 264

Switch-off delay time.... 135

Interior protection.... 97

Internet

Mercedes me connect.... 287

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot.... 268

Web browsers.... 289

Ionisation.... 145

ISOFIX child restraint system

Fitting....63

Suitable seats.... 61

J

Jack

Declaration of conformity.... 31

Storage location.... 349

Jump-start connection.... 330

K

Key

acoustic locking verification signal..... 76

Battery....77

Deactivating a function.... 76

Emergency key 77

Energy consumption....76

Function....75

Key ring attachment.... 77

Problem....78

Unlocking setting.... 76

KEYLESS-GO

Deactivating....76

Locking/unlocking the vehicle.... 80

Problem....80

Unlocking setting.... 76

Kickdown

Using.... 170

Knee airbag....46

L

Lamp

Interior lighting.... 134

Lane Keeping Assist.

Lane recognition (automatic)

Active Lane Keeping Assist.... 215

Language

Notes 270

Setting.... 270

Level control

Licence plate, front assembly.... 22

Light adjustment

Driving abroad.... 126

Light switch.... 126

Lighting

Interior lighting.... 134

Lights

Activating/deactivating the surround lighting.... 134

Active light function.... 129

Adaptive Highbeam Assist.... 131

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus.... 132

Automatic driving lights.... 127

Bad weather light.... 130

City lighting.... 130

Combination switch.... 128

Cornering light.... 129

Fog light (extended range).... 130

Hazard warning lights.... 128

High beam.... 128

Intelligent Light System.... 129

Light adjustment when driving abroad.... 126

Motorway mode.... 130

Reading light 264

Rear fog light.... 127

Responsibility for lighting systems...... 126

Switch-off delay time.... 134

Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off.... 130

Turn signal light.... 128

Lights assistant

High beam.... 132

Limiter

Activating/deactivating.... 192, 196

Buttons.... 192

Calling up a speed.... 192

Function.... 191

Passive mode.... 191

Permanent setting.... 193

Requirements: 192

Selecting.... 192

Setting a speed.... 192

Storing a speed.... 192

LINGUATRONIC

Function.... 261

Starting.... 262

Live Traffic Information 276

Load capacity

Bicycle rack 373

Loading

Bag hook.... 118

Roof luggage rack.... 120

Tie-down eyes.... 118

Loading guidelines.... 112

Loads

Securing.... 112

Locking/unlocking

Additional door lock 78

Automatic locking (MMS)...... 81

Doors (from the inside).... 79

Emergency key 82

KEYLESS-GO 80

Mercedes me connect.... 78

Loud sound

PRE-SAFE® Sound.... 53

Low beam

Activating/deactivating.... 126

Left-hand/right-hand traffic.... 134

Light adjustment when driving abroad.... 126

Setting.... 134

lubricants.... 362

Luggage

Luggage net.... 119

Securing.... 112

Luggage rack.... 112

Lumbar support....99

M

Maintaining safe distance

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC...... 196

Maintenance.... 303

Maintenance Management

Notes.... 304

Transferred data.... 304

Malfunction

Restraint system.... 41

Manoeuvring assistant

Activating/deactivating.... 237

Drive Away Assist.... 236

Map

Displaying online map contents...... 276

Displaying weather information.... 276

Moving....275

Selecting the map orientation..... 275

Setting the map scale.... 275

Switching motorway information on/off 275

Map functions.... 275

Maximum full-stop braking.... 184

Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight... 360

Maximum speeds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles).... 372

MBUX Interior Assistant

Overview....262

Reading light.... 264

Search light 264

MBUX multimedia system

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 181

Drive programs.... 165

Factory setting.... 270

Home screen.... 258

In-Car Office 289

MBUX Interior Assistant.... 262

Media....295

Mercedes me & Apps.... 289

Navigation.... 270

Notes.... 256

Overview.... 256

Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 200

Standby mode function.... 181

System settings.... 266

Touchscreen 259

MBUX reading light.... 264

MBUX search light.... 264

Media

Overview of functions/symbols...... 295

Media display

Operating.... 259

Media mode

Connecting Bluetooth ^® audio equipment.... 298

Medical aids.... 34

Memory function

Head-up display.... 111

Outside mirrors.... 111

Seat.... 111

Steering wheel.... 111

Menu (on-board computer)

Head-up display.... 254

Overview.... 251

Mercedes me App

Activating on-demand features.... 20

Mercedes me Apps.... 289

Mercedes me calls

Arranging a service appointment...... 285

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Centre after automatic accident/

breakdown detection.... 284

Calls via the overhead control panel..... 282

Consenting to the transfer of data...... 285

Information.... 283

Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre...... 283

Transferred data.... 285

Mercedes me connect

Accident/Breakdown Management..... 287

Information.... 287

Transferred data.... 288

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Notes.... 152

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Automatic emergency call.... 292

Data transfer.... 294

ERA-GLONASS test mode.... 294

Information.... 291

Manual emergency call.... 293

Overview 292

Self-diagnosis.... 294

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.... 19

Mercedes-Benz service centre.... 33

Message memory.... 374

Mirrors

Mirror folding function.... 141

Outside mirrors.... 138

Rear-view mirror.... 139

Mobile phone

Notes on wireless charging.... 123

Model type.... 360

MOExtended tyres.... 321

Motorway mode.... 130

MULTIBEAM LED....129

N

Navigation

Activating.... 271

Announcements.... 272

Destination entry.... 273

Displaying/hiding the menu.... 271

Live Traffic Information 276

Map.... 275

Notes 270

Neutral

Engaging.... 167

0

Occupant safety

Airbag.... 46

Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff...... 49

Child seat.... 54

Pets in the vehicle.... 74

PRE-SAFE ^® 53

Seat belt 42

On-board computer, Operating system

Displaying the service due date.... 303

Instrument display.... 253

Menu overview.... 251

Operating.... 251

On-board diagnostics interface.... 32

On-board electronics

Engine electronics.... 357

Two-way radios.... 357

On-demand feature.... 20

Online services.... 38

Open Source Software.... 39

Opening the boot lid using your foot

HANDS-FREE ACCESS....86

Opening the tailgate using your foot

HANDS-FREE ACCESS....86

Operating fluids

AdBlue ^® 367

Additives.... 364

Brake fluid.... 369

Coolant....369

Diesel 365

Engine oil.... 368

Notes.... 362

Petrol....363

Windscreen washer fluid.... 370

Operating safety

48 V on-board electrical system.... 21

Information.... 21

Outside mirrors

Automatic anti-dazzle mode.... 139

Automatic mirror folding function...... 141

Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot

Assist....212

Folding in/out.... 138

Memory function.... 111

Parking position.... 140

Setting.... 138

Warning lamp.... 212

Overhead control panel.... 10

Overview of airbags.... 46

Owner's Manual....20

P

Paint code 360

Panel heating.... 107

Park position

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 166

Engaging....167

Parking

Active Parking Assist.... 231

PARKTRONIC.... 227

Parking aid

Active Parking Assist.... 231

PARKTRONIC....227

Parking Assist

Active Parking Assist.... 231

PARKTRONIC....227

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Activating....230

Activating/deactivating.... 230

Adjusting warning tones.... 231

Deactivating.... 230

Function.... 227

Parking assistance systems

Active Parking Assist.... 231

Drive Away Assist.... 236

PARKTRONIC....227

Parking brake

Electric....178

Parking lights.... 126

Parking position

Outside mirrors.... 140

Storing the position of the passenger

outside mirror using reverse gear..... 140

Parking service

Selecting parking options.... 276

Parking space

Finding.... 276

Parking up....

PARKTRONIC....227

PASSENGER AIR BAG

Status display, co-driver airbag.... 50

Pedestrian protection

Period out of use

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 181

Permissible axle load.

Permitted towing methods

Overview.... 332

Personalisation

User profiles.... 265

Petrol.

s in the vehicle.... 74

Power closing function

Door 81

Power supply

Start/stop button.... 152

Switching on (start/stop button).... 152

PRE-SAFE®, Anticipatory occupant protection

Function.... 53

PRE-SAFE ^® Sound.... 53

Reversing measures.... 53

PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side

Deployment.... 41

Function.... 54

PRE-SAFE® PLUS

Function.... 53

Reversing measures.... 53

Preventative occupant protection system..... 53

Profile

Creating a new profile.... 265

Notes 264

Selecting profile options.... 265

Programs.... 164

Protection of the environment

Driving style.... 18

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles.... 18

Pulling away

Hill Start Assist.... 188

Optimised acceleration.... 156

Q

QR code rescue card.... 35

Qualified specialist workshop.... 33

R

Radar and ultrasonic sensors.... 182

Radio

Overview of functions/symbols...... 299

Radio equipment approval numbers.... 359

Rain closing function

Side windows.... 89

Sliding sunroof.... 93

Rain sensor

Side windows....89

Sliding sunroof.... 93

Windscreen wipers.... 136

REACH regulation.... 34

Reading lamp

Interior lighting.... 134

Rear door (child safety lock)

Securing....72

Rear fog lamp.... 127

Index 469

Rear fog light 127

Rear seat belt Status display.... 45

Rear window Roller sunblind.... 94

Rear window heater.... 142

Rear-view mirror Automatic anti-dazzle mode.... 139

Recycling....18

Reducing agent AdBlue ^® 175

Refuelling Fuel....171 Refuelling the vehicle....171 Topping up AdBlue ^ ....175

Registration.... 34

Regulatory radio identification Indonesia....359 Israel....359 Small components....359

Regulatory radio information Installation clearances.... 359

Remote control Displays....149 Problems....150 Replacing the battery....149 Setting....148 Stationary heater/ventilation....148

Remote Online Charging the starter battery.... 154 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior..... 154 Starting the vehicle.... 155

Replacement key....78 Reserve Fuel....366

Resetting MBUX reset function.... 270

Residual heat.... 145 Responsibility Driving safety systems.... 182

Restraint system Basic instructions for children.....54 Function in the event of an accident.....41 Functionality.....41 Limited protection.....40 Malfunction.....41

Protection....40 Self-test....41 Warning lamp....41

Reverse gear DIRECT SELECT lever.... 166 Engaging.... 167

Reversing camera 360° Camera....221 Care....315 Function....221 Opening the camera cover....227 Switching automatic mode on/off (360° Camera)....227

Roll away protection.... 187 Roller sunblind Rear window.... 94 Roof load.... 371

Roof luggage rack Loading....120 Securing....120

Route Alternative route....274 Calculating....274 Commuter route....274

Navigation.... 272

Selecting options.... 274

Route guidance with augmented reality

Activating.... 274

Displaying road names/house numbers.... 274

Route-based speed adaptation

Function.... 199

Setting.... 200

Run-flat characteristics.... 321

Running-in notes.... 155

S

Safety system.... 183

Safety vest.... 319

Screen

MBUX multimedia system.... 258

Seat

Adjusting (Seat Comfort).... 99

Adjusting electrically.... 101

Automatic adjustment.... 104

Configuring settings.... 103

Correct driver's seat position.... 98

Folding back the backrest (rear).... 117

Folding the backrest forwards (rear)..... 115

Locking the backrest (rear).... 117

Lumbar support....99

Panel heating.... 107

Resetting the settings.... 105

Settings.... 12

Side airbag.... 46

Workout programme.... 105

Seat belt

Activating/deactivating seat belt

adjustment...... 45

Adjusting the height.... 44

Automatic tightening.... 45

Care.... 316

Fastening.... 44

Protection.... 42

Rear seat belt status display.... 45

Reduced protection.... 43

Releasing.... 45

Warning lamp 45

Seat belt adjustment

Activating/deactivating.... 45

Function...... 45

Seat belt tensioners

Deployment.... 41

Seat belt warning.... 45

Seat heating.... 105

Seat height.... 101

Seat ventilation.... 107

Selecting a gear.... 169

Selector lever.... 166

Self-test

Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff.... 50

Restraint system.... 41

Service centre.... 33

Service interval display, ASSYST PLUS.... 303

Service, ASSYST PLUS.... 303

Shifting

Automatic transmission.... 169

Gearshift recommendation.... 169

Manual.... 169

Steering wheel gearshift paddles.... 169

Shortening the braking distance

Brake Assist System.... 184

Index 471

Shunting assistant.... 237

Shunting support.... 237

Side airbag....46

Side windows

Automatic function....89

Child safety lock (rear)....73

Close with key....90

Convenience closing....90

Convenience opening.... 90

Opening/closing....88

Problem....91

Rain closing function.... 89

Skid chains.... 340

Sliding sunroof

Automatic functions.... 93

Close with key....90

Opening with the key.... 90

Opening/closing....91

Problem....93

Rain closing function.... 93

Smartphone Integration, iPhone®

Android Auto....290

Apple CarPlay ^® 290

Snow chains 340

Socket

12 V (front centre console).... 121

230 V (rear passenger compartment)..... 122

Trailer operation.... 243

Sound

Menu 302

PRE-SAFE ^® Sound....53

Wheels/tyres 340

Sound settings.... 302

Spare parts.... 19

Spare wheel

Emergency spare wheel 355

Specialist workshop.... 33

Specific absorption rate.... 23

Speed

Limit, Limiter.... 191

Save, cruise control.... 196

Save, DISTRONIC.... 196

Save, Limiter.... 196

Speed control

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC...... 194

Cruise control.... 190

Limiter....191

Speed limit

Winter tyres.... 194

Speed Limit Assist

Setting....210

System limits.... 209

Standing lights.... 126

Start-off assist

Hill Start Assist.... 188

Optimised acceleration.... 156

Start/stop button

Parking the vehicle.... 177

Starting the vehicle.... 153

Switching on the power supply / vehicle....152

Start/stop function.... 160

Starter battery

Charging via Remote Online.... 154

Starting assistance.... 330

Starting the engine

Emergency operation mode.... 154

Remote Online.... 155

Start/stop button.... 153

Starting-off aid

Drive Away Assist.... 236

Hill Start Assist.... 188

Optimised acceleration.... 156

Stationary heater/ventilation

Activating/deactivating.... 147

Battery remote control.... 149

Operating.... 148

Problems with remote control.... 150

Remote control.... 148

Remote control display.... 149

Status display

Rear seat belt.... 45

Status indicator

Co-driver airbag.... 50

Steer Assist

Active Steering Assist.... 201

STEER CONTROL.... 187

STEER CONTROL.... 187

Steering wheel

Adjusting electrically.... 108

Buttons.... 251

Driver's airbag.... 46

Manually adjusting.... 107

Memory function.... 111

Steering wheel heater.... 109

Steering wheel adjustment.... 108

Steering wheel gearshift paddles.... 169

Steering wheel heater.... 109

Stop/start

ECO start/stop function.... 161

Stopping

Parking the vehicle.... 177

Stowage spaces

Armrest.... 115

Centre console (front).... 115

Door.... 115

Glove compartment.... 115

Suggestions

Configuring.... 265

Sulphur content.... 363

Surround lighting.... 134

Surround sound system

Information.... 302

Suspension

Adjusting the chassis level (AIR BODY

CONTROL).... 219

Damping characteristics.... 218

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.... 218

SVHC

Substances of very high concern.... 34

Switch-off delay time

Exterior.... 134

Interior.... 135

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off..... 145

Synchronisation function

Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 144

System settings

Language setting.... 270

MBUX reset function.... 270

System updates.... 267

T

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles.... 18

Tank content

AdBlue ^® 367

Fuel.... 366

Index 473

Reserve.... 366

Tank filler cap / flap.... 171

Technical data

Axle load (trailer operation).... 373

Component-specific information.... 359

Fastening points of the trailer hitch..... 372

Information.... 357

Mounting dimensions of a trailer hitch.... 372

Overhang dimension of the trailer hitch.. 372

Regulatory radio identification.... 359

Regulatory radio identification – Indonesia and Israel.... 359

Regulatory radio information.... 359

Roof load 371

Tongue weight.... 373

Towing capacity.... 372

Vehicle dimensions.... 371

Telediagnosis

Diagnostic data.... 304

Telediagnostics

Transferred data.... 305

Telephone

Bluetooth ^® 282

Charging wirelessly (mobile phone)...... 124

Connecting a mobile phone.... 282

Emergency call.... 292

Menu 282

Notes 279

Notes on wireless charging (mobile

phone)....123

Operating modes.... 281

Secure Simple Pairing.... 282

Telephone menu overview.... 281

Telephony operating modes

Bluetooth ^® telephony.... 281

Car telephony.... 281

Temperature

Setting the vehicle interior tempera-

ture....142

Themes

Configuring.... 265

Tie-down eyes.... 118

TREFIT kit

Declaration of conformity.... 32

Storage location.... 322

Toll system

Windscreen.... 141

Tongue weight 373

Top Tether....65

Touch Control

MBUX 259

On-board computer.... 251

Touchpad

Operating.... 259

Touchscreen 259

Tow bar system

Towing away 247

Tow-away protection....96

Tow-starting.... 336

Towing

Pulling/towing 247

Towing methods.... 332

Towing away

Both axles on the ground.... 332

Towing eye 335

Towing methods

Overview.... 332

Traffic information

Activating.... 276

Traffic Jam Assistant.... 201

Traffic light warning/display.... 210

Traffic Sign Assist Function.... 210

Setting.... 212

Trailer coupling.... 240

Trailer drawbar, Pulling/towing.... 247

Trailer hitch Axle load.... 373

Bicycle rack.... 245

Care.... 315

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer.... 243

Extending/retracting the ball neck..... 240

Extending/retracting the ball neck (MBUX multimedia system).... 242

Fastening points.... 372

General notes.... 372

Mounting dimensions.... 372

Overhang dimension.... 372

Socket 243

Tongue weight.... 373

Towing capacity.... 372

Trailer Manoeuvering Assist.... 237

Trailer Manoeuvering Assist Function.... 237

Trailer Manoeuvring Assist, Manoeuvring assistant Operation.... 238

Trailer operation Active Blind Spot Assist.... 214 Active Lane Keeping Assist.... 215 Bicycle rack.... 245 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer.... 243 Extending/retracting the ball neck.... 240 Extending/retracting the ball neck (MBUX multimedia system).... 242 Notes.... 239 Socket.... 243

Trailer stabilisation.... 186

Transmission position display.... 166

Transmission positions DIRECT SELECT lever.... 166

Transporting Vehicle.... 334

Tuneln Calling up.... 301

Turn signal indicator.... 128

Turn signal light.... 128

TV HD programmes.... 298

Two-way radios Frequencies.... 358 Installation.... 357 Transmission output.... 358

Type approval number EG.... 360

Tyre pressure Checking.... 343 TIREFIT kit.... 323 Tyre pressure loss warning system, function.... 344 Tyre pressure loss warning system, restarting.... 345 Tyre pressure table.... 342

Tyre pressure loss warning system Function.... 344 Restarting.... 345

Tyre pressure monitoring system Function.... 343 Restarting.... 344

Index 475

Tyre pressure table.... 342

Tyre sealant.... 323

Tyre tread.... 340

Tyre-change tool.... 349

Tyre-change tool kit Overview.... 349

Tyres Breakdown.... 321
Checking.... 340
Checking the temperature.... 343
Fitting.... 354
Interchanging.... 348
MOExtended.... 321
Noise.... 340
Notes on fitting.... 345
Removing.... 353
Removing/fitting hub cap.... 350
Replacing.... 345, 350
Selection.... 345
Snow chains.... 340
Storing.... 349
TREFIT kit.... 323
Tyre pressure loss warning system,
function.... 344

Tyre pressure loss warning system,
restarting.... 345
Tyre pressure table.... 342
Unusual handling characteristics.... 340

U

Unfastening....45

Unlocking setting.... 76

USB port

Rear....123

Stowage compartments (front).... 115

V

Variable limiter.... 191

Vehicle

48 V on-board electrical system.... 21

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 181

Additional door lock....78

Correct use.... 34

Data storage.... 35

Diagnostics connection.... 32

Emergency key 82

enabling, Remote Online.... 155

Equipment.... 20

Implied warranty.... 35
KEYLESS-GO....80
lock automatically (MMS).... 81
Locking/unlocking (from inside)....79
Locking/unlocking using the emer-
gency key....82
Lowering.... 354
Medical aids.... 34
Parking up.... 181
QR code rescue card.... 35
Raising.... 351
REACH regulation.... 34
Registration.... 34
Set collision detection.... 180
Standby mode function.... 181
Starting (start/stop button).... 153
starting, emergency operation mode..... 154
SVHC/substances of very high concern... 34
Switching off, start/stop button..... 177
Switching on (start/stop button)...... 152
Towing 247
Transporting.... 334
ventilate / comfort opening.... 90

Vehicle camera

Information.... 182

Vehicle data

Displaying, DYNAMIC SELECT.... 165

Displaying, MBUX.... 165

Maximum speeds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles).... 372

Roof load.... 371

Vehicle height 371

Vehicle length.... 371

Vehicle width.... 371

Wheelbase.... 371

Vehicle dimensions.... 371

Vehicle emergency start.... 336

Vehicle equipment.... 20

Vehicle identification number.... 360

Vehicle identification plate

EU type approval number.... 360

Maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight 360

Model type.... 360

Paint code 360

Permissible axle load.... 360

VIN.... 360

Vehicle interior

Cooling/heating (Remote Online)...... 154

Vehicle key.... 75

Vehicle sensors.... 182

Vehicle start

Emergency operation mode.... 154

Remote Online.... 155

Start/stop button.... 153

Vehicle tool kit

TREFIT kit.... 322

Towing eye 335

Ventilating....90

Ventilation.... 151

Vents 151

VIN

Engine compartment...... 360

Identification plate.... 360

Seat 360

Vision

Demisting windows.... 145

W

Warning system.... 95

Warning triangle.... 319, 320

Warning/indicator lamp

ABS warning lamp.... 443

Active Brake Assist warning

lamp.... 442

(1) Brake system warning lamp

(red)....441

(1) Brake system warning lamp

(yellow)....440

Coolant warning lamp (red)...... 437

Coolant warning lamp (yellow)..... 438

(P) Electric parking brake indicator

lamp(red)...... 440

(P) Electric parking brake indicator

lamp (yellow)...... 440

Electrical fault warning lamp...... 439

Engine diagnosis warning lamp..... 439

ESP® OFF warning lamp.... 445

ESP® warning lamp flashes...... 444

ESP® warning lamp lights up...... 444

Index 477

Fuel reserve warning lamp
lights up.... 439
Power steering warning lamp
(red) 435
Restraint system warning lamp..... 434
Seat belt warning lamp flashes..... 434
Seat belt warning lamp lights up... 435
Suspension warning lamp (yellow) 443
Trailer tow hitch warning lamp..... 436
Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp flashes.... 446
Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp lights up.... 446
Warning lamp for distance warning function.... 442
Warning/indicator lamps
Instrument display.... 432
PASSENGER AIR BAG....50

Washer fluid
Topping up.... 310
Windscreen washer fluid.... 370
Washing by hand.... 313
Water tank.... 311
Weather information.... 276
Web browsers
Overview....289
Wedge 349
Weight information.... 360
Wheel change
Fitting a new wheel.... 354
Lowering the vehicle.... 354
Preparation.... 350
Raising the vehicle.... 351
Removing a wheel.... 353
Removing/fitting hub caps.... 350
Wheel rotation.... 348
Wheels
Breakdown.... 321
Care.... 315
Checking.... 340
Checking the tyre temperature.... 343

Fitting....354
Interchanging.... 348
MOExtended.... 321
Noise.... 340
Notes on fitting.... 345
Removing 353
Removing/fitting hub cap.... 350
Replacing.... 345, 350
Selection.... 345
Snow chains.... 340
Storing.... 349
TREFIT kit.... 323
Tyre pressure.... 341
Tyre pressure monitoring system.... 343
Unusual handling characteristics...... 340

Wi-Fi Setting up a hotspot.... 268

Window airbag....46

Windows Care....315 Opening/closing....88 Rear window....94 Removing mist....145 Roller sunblind....94

Windscreen

Demisting.... 142

Infrared reflective coating.... 141

Radio waves.... 141

Replacing the wiper blades.... 136

Toll system.... 141

Windscreen washer fluid.... 370

Windscreen washer system.... 310

Windscreen wipers

Activating/deactivating.... 136

Replacing the wiper blades.... 136

Replacing the wiper blades (wind-screen).... 136

Winter operation

Snow chains.... 340

Winter tyres

Limiter.... 194

Setting the permanent speed limit...... 194

Wiper blades

Care.... 315

Replacing (windscreen).... 136

Wipers

Windscreen wipers.... 136

Wireless charging

Mobile phone 124

Overview.... 123

Wireless components

Importer addresses.... 30

Wireless vehicle components

Declaration of conformity.... 23

Specific absorption rate.... 23

Workout programme.... 105

Workshop.... 33

Publication details

Germany

Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Mercedes-Benz AG can be found on the following websites:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com

https://group.mercedes-benz.com

Documentation team

You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address:

Mercedes-Benz AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany

^© Mercedes-Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Mercedes-Benz AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Mercedes-Benz AG

Mercedesstraße 120

70372 Stuttgart

As at 25.02.22

Digital - in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Digital - on the Internet Digital - as an App

Familiarise yourself with the contents of the Owner's Manual directly via the vehicle's multimedia system (menu item "Vehicle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips.

Here you can find comprehensive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form.

You can find the Owner's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.

The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available free-of-charge in familiar App stores.

2575847104Z102

Order no. P257 0315 02 Part no. 257 584 71 04 Z102

Edition AJ2022-2a

Apple® iOS Android